Onkyo Stereo Receiver TX SR875 User Manual

TX-SR805_875_En.book Page 1 Thursday, April 26, 2007 3:00 PM  
Contents  
AV Receiver  
Introduction ..................................... 2  
Connection .................................... 20  
Turning On & First Time Setup..... 44  
TX-SR805  
TX-SR875  
Instruction Manual  
Basic Operation  
Playing your AV components....... 62  
Listening to the Radio.................. 63  
Enjoying the Listening Modes ..... 71  
Thank you for purchasing an Onkyo AV Receiver.  
Please read this manual thoroughly before making  
connections and plugging in the unit.  
Following the instructions in this manual will enable  
you to obtain optimum performance and listening  
enjoyment from your new AV Receiver.  
Advanced Operation..................... 86  
Troubleshooting .......................... 113  
Please retain this manual for future reference.  
En  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Precautions  
1. Recording Copyright—Unless it’s for personal use  
only, recording copyrighted material is illegal with-  
out the permission of the copyright holder.  
For U.S. models  
FCC Information for User  
CAUTION:  
2. AC Fuse—The AC fuse inside the unit is not user-  
serviceable. If you cannot turn on the unit, contact  
your Onkyo dealer.  
The user changes or modifications not expressly  
approved by the party responsible for compliance could  
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.  
3. Care—Occasionally you should dust the unit all  
over with a soft cloth. For stubborn stains, use a soft  
cloth dampened with a weak solution of mild deter-  
gent and water. Dry the unit immediately afterwards  
with a clean cloth. Don’t use abrasive cloths, thin-  
ners, alcohol, or other chemical solvents, because  
they may damage the finish or remove the panel let-  
tering.  
NOTE:  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply  
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to  
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to  
provide reasonable protection against harmful interfer-  
ence in a residential installation.  
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio  
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accor-  
dance with the instructions, may cause harmful interfer-  
ence to radio communications. However, there is no  
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular  
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful inter-  
ference to radio or television reception, which can be  
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the  
user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by  
one or more of the following measures:  
4. Power  
WARNING  
BEFORE PLUGGING IN THE UNIT FOR THE  
FIRST TIME, READ THE FOLLOWING SEC-  
TION CAREFULLY.  
AC outlet voltages vary from country to country.  
Make sure that the voltage in your area meets the  
voltage requirements printed on the unit’s rear panel  
(e.g., AC 230 V, 50 Hz or AC 120 V, 60 Hz).  
The power cord plug is used to disconnect this unit  
from the AC power source. Make sure that the plug  
is readily operable (easily accessible) at all times.  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and  
receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit dif-  
ferent from that to which the receiver is connected.  
For North American model  
Pressing the [STANDBY/ON] button to select  
Standby mode does not fully shutdown the unit. If  
you do not intend to use the unit for an extended  
period, remove the power cord from the AC outlet.  
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV techni-  
cian for help.  
5. Never Touch this Unit with Wet Hands—Never  
handle this unit or its power cord while your hands  
are wet or damp. If water or any other liquid gets  
inside this unit, have it checked by your Onkyo  
dealer.  
For Canadian Models  
NOTE: THIS CLASS B DIGITAL APPARATUS  
COMPLIES WITH CANADIAN ICES-003.  
For models having a power cord with a polarized plug:  
CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK,  
MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT,  
FULLY INSERT.  
6. Handling Notes  
• If you need to transport this unit, use the original  
packaging to pack it how it was when you origi-  
nally bought it.  
• Do not leave rubber or plastic items on this unit  
for a long time, because they may leave marks on  
the case.  
• This unit’s top and rear panels may get warm  
after prolonged use. This is normal.  
• If you do not use this unit for a long time, it may  
not work properly the next time you turn it on, so  
be sure to use it occasionally.  
Modèle canadien  
REMARQUE: CET APPAREIL NUMÉRIQUE DE  
LA CLASSE B EST CONFORME À LA NORME  
NMB-003 DU CANADA.  
Sur les modèles dont la fiche est polarisée:  
ATTENTION: POUR ÉVITER LES CHOCS ÉLEC-  
TRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS  
LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRE-  
SPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER  
JUSQU’AU FOND.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Precautions—Continued  
For British models  
Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power  
supply cord of this unit should be performed only by  
qualified service personnel.  
IMPORTANT  
The wires in the mains lead are coloured in accordance  
with the following code:  
Blue:  
Neutral  
Brown: Live  
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this  
apparatus may not correspond with the coloured mark-  
ings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as  
follows:  
The wire which is coloured blue must be connected to  
the terminal which is marked with the letter N or  
coloured black.  
The wire which is coloured brown must be connected to  
the terminal which is marked with the letter L or  
coloured red.  
IMPORTANT  
The plug is fitted with an appropriate fuse. If the fuse  
needs to be replaced, the replacement fuse must  
approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362 and have the same  
ampere rating as that indicated on the plug. Check for  
the ASTA mark or the BSI mark on the body of the fuse.  
If the power cord’s plug is not suitable for your socket  
outlets, cut it off and fit a suitable plug. Fit a suitable  
fuse in the plug.  
For European Models  
Declaration of Conformity  
We,  
ONKYO EUROPE  
ELECTRONICS GmbH  
LIEGNITZERSTRASSE 6,  
82194 GROEBENZELL,  
GERMANY  
declare in own responsibility, that the ONKYO product  
described in this instruction manual is in compliance with the  
corresponding  
technical standards such as EN60065,  
EN55013, EN55020 and EN61000-3-2, -3-3.  
GROEBENZELL, GERMANY  
K. MIYAGI  
ONKYO EUROPE ELECTRONICS GmbH  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting Audio Inputs ......................................... 70  
Connecting an Outdoor FM Antenna ....................26  
Connecting a TV or Projector ...............................30  
Connecting a Satellite, Cable, or Terrestrial  
Connecting a Camcorder or Other AV  
Connecting a Cassette, CDR, MiniDisc,  
Connecting Zone 3 ............................................. 102  
Resetting the Remote Controller ........................ 109  
Learning Commands .......................................... 111  
Using Macros ...................................................... 112  
HDMI Monitor Setup ............................................46  
HDMI Input Setup .................................................48  
Component Video Input Setup ..............................50  
Changing the Input Display ..................................51  
Digital Input Setup ................................................52  
Troubleshooting ...........................................113  
Specifications ...............................................117  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Features  
Amplifier  
Tuner  
*8  
• 7-channel amplifier  
• XM Satellite Radio ready (N. America only)  
* XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock required; sold separately.  
• 130 watts minimum continuous power per channel, 8  
ohm loads, 2 channels driven from 20 Hz to 20 kHz,  
with a maximum total harmonic distortion of 0.05%  
(FTC)  
*9  
• SIRIUS Satellite Radio ready (N. America only)  
* SiriusConnect Home tuner kit required; sold separately.  
• 40 AM/FM/SIRIUS/XM presets (N. America only)  
• Linear Optimum Gain Volume Circuitry  
• Powered Zone 2 capability  
• 40 AM/FM presets (Other)  
• AM/FM auto tuning  
• Bi-amp capability for front speakers  
• WRAT (Wide Range Amplifier Technology)  
• RDS radio data (Europe only)  
• Direct tuning  
• Massive High Current Power Supply (H.C.P.S.) trans-  
former  
Others  
*10  
• Color-coded speaker terminal posts  
• Audyssey MultEQ XT room correction  
• Easy-to-use onscreen setup menus  
• IR IN and OUT  
Processing  
*1  
• THX Surround EX  
• Preprogrammed remote controller for use with other  
AV components, with Learning and Macro functions  
*1  
• THX Ultra2 certified  
*2  
• Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Digital  
TX-SR875 Only  
Plus, Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Pro Logic IIx  
*3  
• DTS , DTS-ES Discrete, DTS-ES Matrix, DTS-HD  
• 140 watts minimum continuous power per channel, 8  
ohm loads, 2 channels driven from 20 Hz to 20 kHz,  
with a maximum total harmonic distortion of 0.05%  
(FTC)  
MasterAudio, DTS-HD High Resolution, DTS 96/24,  
DTS Neo:6  
*4  
• Neural Surround , THX-Neural  
*5  
• Theater-Dimensional virtual surround sound  
• Zone 2 composite video output  
• DSD Direct  
• 4 HDMI inputs, 1 output (Version 1.3a)  
• Bridging capability for front speakers  
• 192 kHz/24-bit D/A converters  
• Powerful and highly accurate 32-bit DSP processing  
• HDMI upconversion of composite video, S-Video,  
and component sources (720p, 1080i, 1080p capable)  
*6  
• Re-EQ function  
• VLSC (Vector Linear Shaping Circuitry) on all chan-  
nels  
• Tone control on all channels (7.1)  
• 7-band EQ on 7 channels, 5-band EQ on subwoofer  
Audio/Video  
*1  
• Zone 2 with 12V trigger, level, tone, balance, and pre  
out  
THX and Ultra2 are trademarks of THX Ltd. THX may be reg-  
istered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved. Surround EX  
is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories. Used with permission.  
• Zone 3 with level, balance, and pre out  
*7  
• 3 HDMI inputs, 1 output (Version 1.3a)  
• HDMI upconversion of composite video, S-Video,  
and component video sources (720p capable)  
*2  
• Component video upconversion of composite video  
and S-Video sources  
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.  
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol are trademarks  
of Dolby Laboratories.  
• Composite video to S-Video and S-Video to compos-  
ite video conversion  
*3  
• 6 digital inputs (3 optical, 3 coaxial), 1 output (optical)  
• 3 component video inputs, 1 output  
• 6 S-Video inputs, 2 outputs  
“DTS” and “DTS-HD Master Audio” are trademarks of DTS,  
Inc.  
• RS-232 control  
*4  
• Color-coded, assignable 7.1 multichannel input  
• 7.1-channel pre out  
Neural Surround is a trademark owned by Neural Audio Cor-  
poration, THX is a trademark of THX Ltd., which may be reg-  
istered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Supplied Accessories  
Features—Continued  
Make sure you have the following accessories:  
*5  
Theater-Dimensional is a trademark of Onkyo Corporation.  
*6 Re-Equalization and the “Re-EQ” logo are trademarks of THX  
Ltd.  
*7  
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Inter-  
face are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licens-  
ing, LLC.  
Remote controller and three batteries (AA/R6)  
*8  
XM Ready® is a trademark of XM Satellite Radio Inc. ©2005  
XM Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved.  
Speaker setup microphone  
Indoor FM antenna  
*9  
©2005 SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc. “SIRIUS,” SiriusConnect,  
the SIRIUS dog logo, channel names and logos are trademarks  
of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc.Available only in the contiguous  
United States (excluding Alaska and Hawaii) and Canada.  
*10  
Manufactured under license fromAudyssey Laboratories. U.S.  
and foreign patents pending. Audyssey MultEQ XT is a trade-  
mark of Audyssey Laboratories.  
AM loop antenna  
THX Ultra2  
Before any home theater component can be THX  
Ultra2 certified, it must pass a rigorous series of  
quality and performance tests. Only then can a prod-  
uct feature the THX Ultra2 logo, which is your guar-  
antee that the Home Theater products you purchase  
will give you superb performance for many years to  
come. THX Ultra2 requirements define hundreds of  
parameters, including power amplifier performance,  
and pre-amplifier performance and operation for  
both digital and analog domains. THX Ultra2 receiv-  
ers also feature proprietary THX technologies (e.g.,  
THX Mode) which accurately translate movie  
soundtracks for home theater playback.  
Power cord  
(Power cord varies from country to country.)  
1
2
3
Speaker Cable  
Speaker cable labels  
*
In catalogs and on packaging, the letter at the end of the product  
name indicates the color. Specifications and operation are the same  
regardless of color.  
*
*
*
“Xantech” is a registered trademark of Xantech Corporation.  
“Niles” is a registered trademark of Niles Audio Corporation.  
Apple and iPod are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., regis-  
tered in the U.S. and other countries.  
This product incorporates copyright protection tech-  
nology that is protected by U.S. patents and other  
intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright  
protection technology must be authorized by Macro-  
vision Corporation, and is intended for home and  
other limited consumer uses only unless otherwise  
authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or  
disassembly is prohibited.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Multiroom Capability  
You can use three speaker systems with this AV receiver—a surround-sound speaker system (up to 7.1 channels) in  
speaker system in a third room that we call Zone 3 (external power amplifier required). And, you can select a different  
audio source for each room.  
Main Room: In your main listening room, you can enjoy up to 7.1-channel playback (see pages 21–22).  
You can enjoy the various listening modes such as Dolby, DTS, and THX (pages 71–78).  
*While Powered Zone 2 is being used, playback is reduced to 5.1-channels (see page 101).  
Zone 2: In your Zone 2 room, you can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback (see page 101).  
Zone 3: In your Zone 3 room, you can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback (see page 102).  
*The listening modes cannot be used with Zone 2 and Zone 3.  
Main Room  
Surround back left and right  
speakers  
Front left and right speakers  
*While Powered Zone 2 is being  
used, nothing is output by these  
speakers (page 103).  
Subwoofer  
Center speaker  
Surround left and right speakers  
Zone 2 Room  
Zone 3 Room  
Left and right  
stereo speakers  
Left and right  
stereo speakers  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Getting to Know the AV Receiver  
Front Panel  
Not North American model  
3
1 2 456  
7
8 9  
MASTER VOLUME  
STANDBY/ON  
STANDBY  
READY  
ZONE  
ZONE  
2
3
PURE AUDIO  
AUDIO SEL  
DVD  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
GAME/TV  
AUX  
1
AUX  
2
TAPE  
TUNER  
CD  
PHONO  
DISPLAY  
PUSH TO OPEN  
Push here to open  
the flap  
Front flap  
J
K
L
The actual front panel has various logos printed on it. They are not shown here for clarity.  
For detailed information, see the pages in parentheses.  
A STANDBY/ON button (44)  
I MASTER VOLUME control (62)  
Sets the AV receiver to On or Standby.  
Sets the volume of the AV receiver to –dB,  
–81.5 dB, –81.0 dB through +18.0 dB (relative dis-  
play).  
B STANDBY indicator (44)  
Lights up when the AV receiver is on Standby and  
flashes while a signal is being received from the  
remote controller.  
The volume level can also be displayed as an abso-  
lute value. See “Volume Setup” on page 96.  
Selects the Pure Audio listening mode. The indica-  
tor lights up when this mode is selected. Pressing  
this button again selects the previous listening  
mode.  
C READY indicator (99)  
North American model doesn’t have this indicator.  
Lights up when the AV receiver is on Standby and  
D ZONE 2 indicator (105)  
Flashes when Zone 2 is being set. Lights up when  
Zone 2 is on.  
K AUDIO SEL button (70)  
Selects the audio input: analog, digital, HDMI, or  
multichannel.  
E ZONE 3 indicator (105)  
Flashes when Zone 3 is being set. Lights up when  
Zone 3 is on.  
L Input selector buttons (62)  
Select the following input sources: DVD,  
VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV, AUX 1, AUX 2,  
TAPE, TUNER, CD, PHONO.  
F Remote-control sensor (14)  
Receives control signals from the remote controller.  
G Display  
See “Display” on page 11.  
H DISPLAY button (69)  
Displays various information about the currently  
selected input source.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Getting to Know the AV Receiver—Continued  
North American model  
M
N OP Q RS TUV W X Y  
Z
a
PUSH TO OPEN  
TUNING  
RETURN  
ZONE  
ZONE  
2
3
OFF  
LEVEL  
TONE  
HDMI OUT  
STEREO  
THX  
AUX  
2
INPUT  
SETUP MIC  
TUNING  
PHONES  
DIMMER MEMORY MODE  
SETUP  
PRESET  
CLEAR  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
S
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL INPUT  
LISTENING MODE  
ENTER  
TUNING  
b c d  
Other models  
e
T
PUSH TO OPEN  
TUNING  
PRESET  
RETURN  
ZONE  
ZONE  
2
OFF  
LEVEL  
TONE  
HDMI OUT  
STEREO  
THX  
AUX  
2
INPUT  
SETUP MIC  
TUNING  
PHONES  
POWER  
RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE  
SETUP  
CLEAR  
ON  
OFF  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
S
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
3
DIGITAL INPUT  
LISTENING MODE  
ENTER  
TUNING  
For detailed information, see the pages in parentheses.  
M PHONES jack (69)  
V TUNING MODE button (63)  
This 1/4-inch phone jack is for connecting a stan-  
dard pair of stereo headphones for private listening.  
Selects the Auto or Manual tuning mode for AM  
and FM radio.  
N ZONE 2, ZONE 3, and OFF buttons (105)  
W SETUP button  
Opens and closes the onscreen setup menus, which  
are displayed on the connected TV.  
The ZONE 3 button is used when setting Zone 3.  
X TUNING, PRESET, Arrow, and ENTER  
The OFF button is used to turn off Zone 2 or  
Zone 3.  
buttons  
When AM or FM is selected, the TUNING [  
]
O LEVEL button (106)  
Used when adjusting the volume level of Zone 2 or  
Zone 3.  
[
] buttons are used for radio tuning, and the PRE-  
SET [ ] [ ] buttons are used to select radio pre-  
sets (see page 67). With the onscreen setup menus,  
they work as arrow buttons and are used to select  
and set items. The ENTER button is also used with  
the onscreen setup menus.  
P TONE button (106)  
Used to adjust the tone (bass and treble).  
Q HDMI OUT button (47)  
Used to set the HDMI Monitor setting.  
Y RETURN button  
R STEREO button (71)  
Selects the previously displayed onscreen setup  
menu.  
Selects the Stereo listening mode.  
S THX button (71)  
Z SETUP MIC (55)  
Selects the THX listening modes.  
The automatic speaker setup microphone connects  
here.  
Adjusts the display brightness.  
a AUX 2 INPUT (39, 79)  
Used to connect a camcorder, game console, and so  
on. There are input jacks for optical digital audio,  
S-Video, composite video, and analog audio.  
On models other than the North American model,  
this is the RT/PTY/TP button, and it’s used with  
RDS (Radio Data System). See “Using RDS (not  
North American model)” on page 65.  
b Up [ ] and Down [ ] buttons (82, 106)  
Used to adjust the tone, and the volume and balance  
of Zone 2 and Zone 3.  
U MEMORY button (67)  
Used when storing or deleting radio presets.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting to Know the AV Receiver—Continued  
c DIGITAL INPUT button (53)  
e POWER switch (44)  
Used to assign digital inputs to input selectors.  
American models do not have this switch.  
This is the main power switch. When set to OFF, the  
AV receiver is completely shutdown. It must be set  
to ON to set the AV receiver to On or Standby.  
d LISTENING MODE [ ]/[ ] buttons (71)  
Select the Onkyo original listening modes.  
Display  
123 4  
5 6  
7 8  
9
0 A B  
For detailed information, see the pages in parentheses.  
AUTO (63): Lights up when Auto Tuning mode is  
selected for AM or FM radio. Goes off when Man-  
ual Tuning mode is selected.  
1Speaker/channel indicators (76)  
Indicate the speaker configuration and channels  
used by the current input source.  
: A box is displayed for each speaker that’s set  
in the Speaker Configuration. No box appears for  
speakers that are set to No or None.  
tion.  
reo FM station.  
The following abbreviations indicate which audio  
channels are included in the current input signal.  
6SLEEP indicator (69)  
FL: Front left  
C: Center  
FR: Front right  
SL: Surround left  
LFE: Subwoofer (Low Frequency Effects)  
SR: Surround right  
SBL: Surround back left  
SB: Surround back  
SBR: Surround back right  
Lights up when the Sleep function has been set.  
7Audyssey indicator (55)  
Lights up during automatic speaker setup.  
8Headphone indicator (69)  
into the PHONES jack.  
9Message area  
0Audio input indicators (70)  
2BTL indicator (45) (TX-SR875 only)  
Lights up when the Speaker Type setting is set to  
BTL for bridged front speaker operation.  
audio source: HDMI, ANALOG, or DIGITAL.  
AVolume level (62)  
3ZONE 2 indicator (105)  
Displays the volume level.  
BMUTING indicator (68)  
4Listening mode and format indicators (71)  
Show the selected listening mode and audio input  
signal format.  
Flashes while the AV receiver is muted.  
5Tuning indicators (63)  
RDS (not North American model) (65):  
Lights up when tuned to a radio station that supports  
RDS (Radio Data System).  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Getting to Know the AV Receiver—Continued  
Rear Panel  
North American model only  
78  
TX-SR875 only  
K
1 2 3 4  
5 6  
9 J  
LMN  
O
HDMI  
ASSIGNABLE  
AC INLET  
IN  
4
IN  
3
IN  
2
IN  
XM  
1
OUT  
RS232  
ANTENNA  
ASSIGNABLE  
MONITOR  
OUT  
AM  
FM75  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
IN IN IN 1(DVD)  
SIRIUS  
3
2
Y
MONITOR  
DVD  
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
OUT  
IR  
V
IN  
REMOTE  
C
B/PB  
ZONE  
OUT  
2
V
S
CONTROL  
12V TRIGGER  
ASSIGNABLE  
COAXIAL  
DIGITAL  
OUT ZONE  
2
IN  
1
(DVD)  
CR/PR  
S
OUT  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
FRONT CENTER  
SURR SURR BACK FRONT CENTER SURR  
SURR BACK ZONE  
2
ZONE  
3
(VCR/DVR)  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
2
3
1
2
L
L
L
AC OUTLET  
AC 120V 60Hz  
SWITCHED  
(CBL/SAT)  
R
R
R
120W 1A MAX.  
OPTICAL  
SUBWOOFER  
CENTER  
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT  
MULTI CH  
PRE OUT  
PHONO  
CD  
TAPE  
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
FRONT R  
VCR/DVR  
SURR R  
DVD  
(GAME/TV)  
(CD)  
GND  
SURR BACK R  
Bi-AMP  
SURR BACK L  
Bi-AMP  
ZONE2 R  
SURR L  
FRONT L  
ZONE2 L  
OUT  
(BTL)  
(BTL)  
FRONT R  
FRONT  
L
P Q R  
S T U V WX YZ a  
b
c d  
e
with an HDMI output, such as a DVD player, DVD  
recorder, or DVR (digital video recorder). They’re  
assignable, which means you can assign each one to  
an input selector to suit your setup. See “HDMI  
Input Setup” on page 48.  
A
REMOTE CONTROL  
This  
(Remote Interactive) jack can be con-  
nected to the  
jack on another  
-capable  
Onkyo component for remote and system control.  
To use , you must make an analog audio connec-  
tion (RCA) between the AV receiver and the other  
component, even if they are connected digitally.  
The HDMI output is for connecting a TV or projec-  
tor with an HDMI input.  
B RS232  
This port is for connecting the AV receiver to home  
G SIRIUS antenna (on North American model)  
This jack is for connecting a SIRIUS digital  
antenna, sold separately (see the separate SIRIUS  
instructions).  
automation equipment and external controllers.  
C PHONO IN  
This audio input is for connecting a turntable.  
H XM antenna (on North American model)  
This jack is for connecting an XM Mini-Tuner and  
instructions).  
D COMPONENT VIDEO IN 1, 2, and 3  
such as a DVD player, DVD recorder, or DVR (dig-  
ital video recorder). They’re assignable, which  
means you can assign each one to an input selector  
to suit your setup. See “Component Video Input  
Setup” on page 50.  
I MONITOR OUT  
The S-Video or composite video jack should be  
connected to a video input on your TV or projector.  
J AM ANTENNA  
These push terminals are for connecting an AM  
antenna.  
E COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT  
This RCA component video output is for connect-  
ing a TV or projector with a component video input.  
K ZONE 2 OUT (TX-SR875 only)  
This composite video output can be connected to a  
video input on a TV in Zone 2.  
F HDMI IN 1–4 and OUT  
The TX-SR805 has HDMI IN 1–3 and OUT.  
L FM ANTENNA  
HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) con-  
nections carry digital audio and digital video.  
This jack is for connecting an FM antenna.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Getting to Know the AV Receiver—Continued  
M IR IN/OUT  
A commercially available IR receiver can be con-  
W CBL/SAT IN  
A cable or satellite receiver can be connected here.  
There’s S-Video and composite video input jacks  
for connecting the video signal.  
nected to the IR IN jack, allowing you to control the  
AV receiver while you’re in Zone 2, or control it  
when it’s out of sight, for example, installed in a  
cabinet.  
X VCR/DVR IN/OUT  
A video component, such as a VCR or DVR, can be  
connected here for recording and playback. There’s  
S-Video and composite video input and output jacks  
for connecting the video signal.  
A commercially available IR emitter can be con-  
nected to the IR OUT jack to pass IR (infrared)  
remote control signals through to other components.  
N 12V TRIGGER OUT ZONE 2  
Y DVD IN  
This output can be connected to the 12-volt trigger  
input on a component in Zone 2. When Zone 2 is  
turned on on the AV receiver, a 12-volt trigger sig-  
nal is output.  
This input is for connecting a DVD player. There’s  
S-Video and composite video input jacks for con-  
necting the video signal.  
Z FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURR L/R, and SURR  
BACK L/R SPEAKERS  
O AC INLET  
The supplied power cord is connected here. The  
other end of the power cord should be connected to  
a suitable wall outlet.  
These terminal posts are for connecting the front  
speakers.  
P DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 1, 2, and 3  
ing components with a coaxial digital audio output,  
such as a CD player or DVD player. They’re assign-  
able, which means you can assign each one to an  
input selector to suit your setup. See “Digital Input  
Setup” on page 52.  
posts can be used with front speakers and surround  
back speakers respectively, or used to bi-amp or  
bridge the front speakers. See “Bi-amping the Front  
Speakers” and “Bridging the Front Speakers  
(TX-SR875 only)” on page 24.  
The TX-SR805 does not support bridging.  
Q DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1, 2, and OUT  
components with an optical digital audio output,  
such as a CD player or DVD player. They’re assign-  
able, which means you can assign each one to an  
input selector to suit your setup. See “Digital Input  
Setup” on page 52.  
a MULTI CH input: FRONT L/R, CENTER, SUB-  
WOOFER, SURR L/R, and SURR BACK L/R  
This analog multichannel input is for connecting a  
component with a 5.1/7.1-channel analog audio out-  
put, such as a DVD player, DVD-Audio or  
SACD-capable player, or an MPEG decoder.  
b PRE OUT: FRONT L/R, CENTER, SUB-  
WOOFER, SURR L/R, and SURR BACK L/R  
This 5.1/7.1 multichannel analog audio output can  
be connected to the analog audio input on a multi-  
channel power amplifier for when you want to use  
the AV receiver solely as a preamplifier. The SUB-  
WOOFER jack is for connecting a powered sub-  
woofer.  
The optical digital audio output is for connecting a  
digital recorder with an optical digital input, such as  
a CD recorder.  
R GND screw  
This screw is for connecting a turntable’s ground  
wire.  
S CD IN  
c PRE OUT: ZONE 2, ZONE 3  
This analog audio input is for connecting a CD  
player’s analog audio output.  
These analog audio outputs can be connected to the  
line inputs on amplifiers in Zone 2 and Zone 3.  
T TAPE IN/OUT  
d ZONE 2 L/R SPEAKERS  
These terminal posts are for connecting speakers in  
Zone 2.  
These analog audio input and output jacks are for  
connecting a recorder with an analog audio input  
and output, such as a cassette deck, MD recorder,  
etc.  
e AC OUTLET (North American and European  
models only)  
U AUX 1 IN  
A VCR for playback only or other video source can  
be connected here. There’s S-Video and composite  
video input jacks for connecting the video signal.  
These switched AC outlets can be used to supply  
power to other AV components. The type and num-  
ber of outlets depends on the country in which you  
purchased your AV receiver.  
V GAME/TV IN  
A game console or TV output can be connected  
here. There’s S-Video and composite video input  
jacks for connecting the video signal.  
See pages 20–43 for hookup information.  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Controller  
Installing the Batteries  
Using the Remote Controller  
When using the remote controller, point it toward the AV  
receiver’s remote control sensor, as shown below.  
To open the battery compartment, press  
the small hollow and slide open the cover.  
1
Remote control sensor  
STANDBY indicator  
AV receiver  
30˚  
30˚  
Insert the three supplied batteries (AA/R6)  
in accordance with the polarity diagram  
inside the battery compartment.  
2
Approx. 16 ft.  
(5 m)  
Notes:  
• The remote controller may not work reliably if the AV  
receiver is subjected to bright light, such as direct sun-  
light or inverter-type fluorescent lights. Keep this in  
mind when installing.  
• If another remote controller of the same type is used in  
the same room, or the AV receiver is installed close to  
equipment that uses infrared rays, the remote control-  
ler may not work reliably.  
Slide the cover shut.  
3
• Don’t put anything on top of the remote controller,  
such as a book or magazine, because a button may be  
pressed continuously, thereby draining the batteries.  
• The remote controller may not work reliably if the AV  
receiver is installed in a rack behind colored glass  
doors. Keep this in mind when installing.  
• The remote controller will not work if there’s an obsta-  
cle between it and the AV receiver’s remote control  
sensor.  
Notes:  
• If the remote controller doesn’t work reliably, try  
replacing the batteries.  
• Don’t mix new and old batteries or different types of  
batteries.  
• If you intend not to use the remote controller for a long  
time, remove the batteries to prevent damage from  
leakage or corrosion.  
• Expired batteries should be removed as soon as possi-  
ble to prevent damage from leakage or corrosion.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Remote Controller—Continued  
About the Remote Controller Modes  
RECEIVER/TAPE Mode  
As well as the AV receiver, you can also use the remote  
controller to control your other AV components. The  
remote controller has a specific operating mode for use  
with each type of component. Modes are selected by  
using the REMOTE MODE buttons.  
RECEIVER/TAPE mode is used to control the AV  
receiver. It can also be used to control an Onkyo cassette  
recorder connected via  
.
To set the remote controller to RECEIVER/TAPE  
mode, press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE  
button.  
RECEIVER/TAPE Mode  
In RECEIVER/TAPE mode, you can control the AV  
receiver and an Onkyo cassette recorder connected via  
.
A
ON  
STANDBY  
TV  
DVD Mode  
INPUT  
B
C
By default, you can control an Onkyo DVD player in this  
mode. By entering the appropriate remote control code,  
you can control components made by other manufactur-  
ers (see page 108).  
L
M
DVD  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
3
+
TV CH  
-
1
GAME/TV  
4
2
AUX1  
5
AUX2  
6
TAPE  
7
TUNER  
8
CD  
9
CD/CDR/MD Mode  
TV VOL  
PHONO  
D. TUN  
By default, you can control an Onkyo CD player in this  
mode. By entering the appropriate remote control code,  
you can control a CD player, MD recorder, or CD  
recorder made by another manufacturer (see page 108).  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
INPUT SELECTOR  
MACRO  
CLEAR  
0
11  
12  
D
ZONE  
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
ZONE  
CDR/MD  
DOCK Mode  
This mode is for controlling an Apple iPod in an Onkyo  
RI Dock that’s connected via  
RECEIVER  
TV  
CABLE  
SAT  
DOCK  
RECEIVER  
TAPE/AMP  
SLEEP  
N
O
TAPE/AMP  
.
DIMMER  
5
F
TV and VCR Modes  
With these modes, you can control a TV and VCR. You  
page 108).  
+
CH  
ENTER  
VOL  
DISC  
ALBUM  
G
P
-
H
I
Q
R
PREV  
CH  
CABLE/SAT Mode  
lite TV receiver. You must enter the appropriate remote  
control code first (see page 108).  
DISPLAY  
MUTING  
1
ZONE 2/ZONE 3 Modes  
These modes are for controlling Zone 2 and Zone 3 (see  
page 105).  
REC  
PLAYLIST  
RANDOM  
LISTENING MODE  
SURR  
STEREO  
J
K
REPEAT  
PURE A  
AUDIO  
DIRECT  
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE  
THX  
ALL ST  
Use the REMOTE MODE buttons to select  
a mode.  
1
-
+
LEVEL  
TEST TONE  
CH SEL  
LEVEL  
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF  
AUDIO SEL  
L NIGHT  
DVD  
Re-EQ  
HDD  
S
T
VCR  
Use the buttons supported by that mode  
2
to control the component.  
RECEIVER/TAPE mode: see page 15  
DVD mode: see page 17  
RC-690  
M
U
CD/MD/CDR mode: see page 18  
DOCK mode: see page 19  
TV, VCR, CABLE/SAT modes: see page 110  
Note:  
Some of the remote controller functions described in this  
manual may not work as expected with other compo-  
nents.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Remote Controller—Continued  
T L NIGHT button (81)  
Turns the Late Night function on or off.  
A STANDBY button (44)  
U AUDIO SEL button (70)  
Selects the audio input: analog, digital, HDMI, or  
multichannel.  
Sets the AV receiver to Standby.  
B ON button (44)  
Turns on the AV receiver.  
C INPUT SELECTOR buttons (62)  
Used to select the input source.  
TAPE mode  
On twin cassette decks, only Deck B can be controlled.  
D MACRO buttons (112)  
1Previous and Next [  
The Previous [ ] button selects the previous  
track. During playback it selects the beginning of  
]/[  
] buttons  
Used with the Macro function.  
E DIMMER button (68)  
Adjusts the display brightness.  
the current track. The Next [  
next track.  
] button selects the  
F Arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] and ENTER buttons  
Used to select and adjust settings.  
Depending on how they were recorded, the Previous  
and Next [ ]/[ ] buttons may not work prop-  
G CH +/– button (67)  
Selects radio presets.  
erly with some cassette tapes.  
H SETUP button  
Play [ ] button  
Starts playback.  
Used to change settings.  
I DISPLAY button (69)  
Rewind and Fast Forward [ ]/[ ] buttons  
The Rewind [ ] button starts rewind. The Fast  
Forward [ ] button starts fast forward.  
Displays information about the current input source.  
J LISTENING MODE buttons (71)  
[SURR], and LISTENING MODE [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons can be used at any time, regardless of the cur-  
rently selected remote controller mode.  
Reverse Play [ ] button  
Starts reverse playback.  
Stop [ ] button  
Stops playback.  
K TEST TONE, CH SEL, LEVEL–, and LEVEL+  
buttons (68, 90)  
REC [ ] button  
Starts recording.  
Used to adjust the level of each speaker.  
L LIGHT button  
Turns the remote controller’s illuminated buttons on  
or off.  
M D.TUN button (64)  
Selects the Direct tuning mode for radio.  
N REMOTE MODE buttons (15)  
Used to select the remote controller modes. When  
you press a button, the REMOTE MODE button for  
the currently selected mode lights up.  
O SLEEP button (69)  
Used with the Sleep function.  
P VOL [ ]/[ ] button (62)  
Adjusts the volume of the AV receiver regardless of  
Q RETURN button  
tings.  
R MUTING button (68)  
Mutes or unmutes the AV receiver.  
S Re-EQ button (81)  
Turns the Re-EQ function on or off.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Controller—Continued  
A STANDBY button  
DVD Mode  
Sets the DVD player to Standby.  
To set the remote controller to DVD mode, press the  
[DVD] REMOTE MODE button.  
B ON button  
Turns on the DVD player.  
C Number buttons  
Used to enter title, chapter, and track numbers, and  
to enter times for locating specific points.  
D TOP MENU button  
Selects a DVD’s top menu.  
A
E Arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] and ENTER buttons  
ON  
STANDBY  
TV  
Used to navigate menus and select items.  
B
C
INPUT  
DVD  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
3
F DISC +/– button  
+
TV CH  
-
1
GAME/TV  
4
2
AUX1  
5
Selects discs on a DVD changer.  
AUX  
6
2
G SETUP button  
TAPE  
7
TUNER  
8
CD  
9
Used to access the DVD player’s settings.  
TV VOL  
PHONO  
D. TUN  
H DISPLAY button  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
INPUT SELECTOR  
MACRO  
CLEAR  
0
11  
12  
Displays information about the current disc, title,  
chapter, or track, including elapsed time, remaining  
time, total time, and so on.  
M
ZONE  
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
ZONE  
I Playback buttons  
CDR/MD  
DVD  
From left to right: Previous, Play, Next, Rewind,  
Pause, Stop, Fast Forward, Slow Reverse, and Slow  
Forward.  
TV  
CABLE  
SAT  
DOCK  
RECEIVER  
TAPE/AMP  
SLEEP  
D
E
DIMMER  
N
J REPEAT button  
+
Used with the repeat playback function.  
CH  
ENTER  
VOL  
DISC  
ALBUM  
F
K AUDIO button  
-
Selects foreign language soundtracks and audio for-  
mats (e.g., Dolby Digital or DTS).  
O
G
H
PREV  
CH  
DISPLAY  
MUTING  
L OPEN/CLOSE [ ] button  
Opens and closes the disc tray.  
I
M CLEAR button  
REC  
PLAYLIST  
RANDOM  
Cancels functions and clears entered numbers.  
P
LISTENING MODE  
SURR  
N MENU button  
STEREO  
Displays a DVD’s menu.  
REPEAT  
PURE A  
AUDIO  
DIRECT  
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE  
THX  
ALL ST  
J
K
Q
R
O RETURN button  
Exits the DVD player’s onscreen setup menu.  
-
+
LEVEL  
TEST TONE  
CH SEL  
LEVEL  
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF  
P RANDOM button  
AUDIO SEL  
L NIGHT  
DVD  
Re-EQ  
HDD  
L
VCR  
Used with the random playback function.  
S
RC-690  
M
Q PLAY MODE button  
Selects play modes on components with selectable  
play modes.  
R SUBTITLE button  
Selects subtitles.  
S VIDEO OFF button  
Turns off the internal video circuitry, eliminating  
any possibility of interference.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Controller—Continued  
A STANDBY button  
CD/MD/CDR Modes  
Sets the component to Standby.  
To control an Onkyo CD player, MD recorder, or CD  
recorder, or a CD or MD player/recorder made by  
another manufacturer, press the [CD] REMOTE  
troller mode.  
In order to control an Onkyo MD recorder or CD  
recorder, or a component made by another manufacturer,  
you must first enter the appropriate remote control code  
(see page 108).  
B ON button  
Set the component to On or Standby.  
C Number buttons  
Used to enter track numbers and times for locating  
specific points.  
D Arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] and ENTER buttons  
Used with some components.  
E DISC +/– button  
Selects discs on a CD changer.  
F DISPLAY button  
Displays information about the current disc or track,  
including elapsed time, remaining time, total time,  
and so on.  
A
ON  
STANDBY  
TV  
INPUT  
B
C
G Playback buttons  
DVD  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
3
+
TV CH  
-
1
GAME/TV  
4
2
AUX1  
5
From left to right: Previous, Play, Next, Rewind,  
Pause, Stop, and Fast Forward.  
AUX  
6
2
TAPE  
7
TUNER  
8
CD  
9
H REC [ ] button  
Starts recording.  
TV VOL  
PHONO  
D. TUN  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
INPUT SELECTOR  
MACRO  
CLEAR  
0
11  
12  
I REPEAT button  
K
Used with the repeat playback function.  
ZONE  
3
2
1
2
3
J OPEN/CLOSE [ ] button  
REMOTE MODE  
CD  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
ZONE  
Opens or closes the disc tray or ejects the MiniDisc.  
CDR/MD  
CDR/MD  
TV  
CABLE  
SAT  
DOCK  
RECEIVER  
TAPE/AMP  
SLEEP  
K CLEAR button  
Cancels functions and clears entered numbers.  
DIMMER  
L RETURN button  
D
E
Used with some components.  
+
CH  
ENTER  
VOL  
DISC  
ALBUM  
M RANDOM button  
Used with the random playback function.  
-
PREV  
CH  
N PLAY MODE button  
F
7
8
Selects play modes on components with selectable  
play modes.  
DISPLAY  
MUTING  
L
REC  
PLAYLIST  
RANDOM  
M
N
LISTENING MODE  
SURR  
STEREO  
REPEAT  
PURE A  
AUDIO  
DIRECT  
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE  
THX  
ALL ST  
9
J
-
+
LEVEL  
TEST TONE  
CH SEL  
LEVEL  
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF  
AUDIO SEL  
L NIGHT  
DVD  
Re-EQ  
HDD  
VCR  
RC-690  
M
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Controller—Continued  
A STANDBY button  
DOCK Mode  
Turns off the iPod.  
Dock mode is for controlling anApple iPod in an Onkyo  
B ON button*  
RI Dock that’s connected via  
.
Turns on the iPod.  
• Connect the RI Dock to the TAPE IN or GAME/TV  
IN L/R jacks.  
C TOP MENU button  
Works as a Mode button when used with a DS-A2  
RI Dock.  
• Set the RI Dock’s RI MODE switch to HDD.  
D Arrow [ ]/[ ] and ENTER buttons*  
• Set the AV receiver’s Input Display to DOCK (see  
page 51).  
Used to navigate menus and select items.  
E ALBUM +/– button*  
• See to the RI Dock’s instruction manual for more  
information.  
Selects the next or previous album.  
F DISPLAY button*  
Turns on the backlight for 30 seconds.  
G Previous [  
] button  
Restarts the current song. Press it twice to select the  
previous song.  
A
ON  
STANDBY  
TV  
INPUT  
B
H Pause [ ] button  
DVD  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
3
Pauses playback. (With 3rd generation iPods, it  
works as a Play/Pause button.)  
+
TV CH  
-
1
GAME/TV  
4
2
AUX1  
5
AUX  
6
2
I Rewind [ ] button  
TAPE  
7
TUNER  
8
CD  
9
Press and hold to rewind.  
TV VOL  
PHONO  
D. TUN  
J PLAYLIST [ ]/[ ] buttons*  
Used to select the previous or next playlist on the  
iPod.  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
INPUT SELECTOR  
MACRO  
CLEAR  
0
11  
12  
ZONE  
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE  
K REPEAT button*  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
ZONE  
CDR/MD  
Used with the repeat function.  
DOCK  
TV  
CABLE  
SAT  
DOCK  
RECEIVER  
TAPE/AMP  
SLEEP  
L MENU button*  
DIMMER  
C
4
Used to access menus.  
L
M Play [ ] button  
+
Starts playback. If the component is off, it will turn  
on automatically. (With 3rd generation iPods, this  
button works as a Play/Pause button.)  
CH  
ENTER  
VOL  
DISC  
ALBUM  
5
6
-
PREV  
CH  
N Next [  
] button  
M
Selects the next song.  
DISPLAY  
MUTING  
N
O
P
Q
7
8
O Stop [ ] button  
Stops playback and displays a menu.  
9
REC  
PLAYLIST  
RANDOM  
P Fast Forward [ ] button  
Press and hold to fast forward.  
J
LISTENING MODE  
SURR  
STEREO  
Q RANDOM button*  
REPEAT  
PURE A  
AUDIO  
DIRECT  
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE  
Used with the shuffle function.  
THX  
ALL ST  
K
R
R PLAY MODE button  
-
+
LEVEL  
TEST TONE  
CH SEL  
LEVEL  
Used to select play modes on components with  
selectable play modes.  
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF  
AUDIO SEL  
L NIGHT  
DVD  
Re-EQ  
HDD  
VCR  
Works as a Resume button when used with a DS-A2  
RI Dock.  
RC-690  
M
*Buttons marked with an asterisk (*) are not supported  
by 3rd generation iPods.  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ConnectingYour Speakers  
Enjoying Home Theater  
Thanks to the AV receiver’s superb capabilities, you can enjoy surround sound with a real sense of movement in your  
own home—just like being in a movie theater or concert hall. You can enjoy DVDs featuring Dolby Digital or DTS.  
With analog or digital TV, you can enjoy Dolby Pro Logic IIx, DTS Neo:6, or Onkyo’s original DSP listening modes.  
You can also enjoy THX Surround EX (THX-certified THX speaker system recommended).  
Surround left and right speakers  
These speakers are used for precise  
sound positioning and to add realistic  
ambience.  
Front left and right speakers  
These output the main sound.Their role in a home theater is to provide a solid  
anchor for the sound image. They should be positioned facing the listener at  
about ear level, and equally spaced from the TV. Angle them inward slightly so  
as to create a triangle, with the listener at the apex.  
Position them at the sides of the lis-  
tener, or slightly behind, about 2–3 feet  
(60–100 cm) above ear level. Ideally  
they should be equally spaced from the  
listener.  
Center speaker  
This speaker enhances the front left  
and right speakers, making sound  
movements distinct and providing a  
full sound image. For movies it’s used  
mainly for dialog.  
Position it close to yourTV (preferably  
on top) facing forward at about ear  
level, or at the same height as the  
front left and right speakers.  
Subwoofer  
The subwoofer handles the bass sounds of  
the LFE (Low-Frequency Effects) channel.  
The volume and quality of the bass output  
from your subwoofer will depend on its posi-  
tion, the shape of your listening room, and  
your listening position.In general, a good bass  
sound can be obtained by installing the sub-  
woofer in a front corner, or at one-third the way  
along the front wall, as shown.  
Surround back left and right speakers  
These speakers are necessary to enjoy Dolby Digital  
EX, DTS-ES Matrix, DTS-ES Discrete, THX Surround  
EX, etc. They enhance the realism of surround sound  
and improve sound localization behind the listener. Posi-  
tion them behind the listener about 2–3 feet  
(60–100 cm) above ear level.  
Tip: To nd the best position for your sub-  
woofer, while playing a movie or some music  
with good bass, experiment by placing your  
subwoofer at various positions within the  
room and choose the  
one that provides  
the most satisfying  
results.  
Corner  
position  
1/3 of wall  
position  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
ConnectingYour Speakers—Continued  
Connecting a Powered Subwoofer  
ConnectingYour Speakers  
Using a suitable cable, connect the AV receiver’s SUB-  
WOOFER PRE OUT to the input on your powered sub-  
woofer. If your subwoofer is unpowered and you’re  
using an external amplifier, connect the SUBWOOFER  
PRE OUT to the amp’s input.  
Speaker Configuration  
For the best surround-sound experience, you should con-  
nect seven speakers and a powered subwoofer.  
The following table shows which channels you should  
use based on the number of speakers you have.  
HDMI  
ASSIGNABLE  
Number of speakers:  
Front left  
2
3
4
5
6
7
RS232  
IN  
4
IN  
3
IN  
2
IN  
1
OUT  
Powered  
subwoofer  
ANTENNA  
ASSIGNABLE  
AM  
FM75  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
IN IN IN 1(DVD)  
MONITOR  
3
2
OUT  
Y
MONITOR  
OUT  
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
DVD  
IR  
IN  
V
REMOTE  
C
B/PB  
ZONE  
OUT  
2
V
S
CONTROL  
12V TRIGGER  
OUT ZONE  
ASSIGNABLE  
COAXIAL  
DIGITAL  
2
IN  
1
(DVD)  
C
R/PR  
S
OUT  
Front right  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
FRONT CENTER  
SURR SURR BACK FRONT CENTER SURR  
SURR BACK ZONE  
2
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
2
3
1
2
(VCR/DVR)  
L
L
(CBL/SAT)  
R
R
OPTICAL  
SUBWOOFER  
CENTER  
LINE INPUT  
CD  
TAPE  
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
SURR  
DVD  
MULTI CH  
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT  
FRONT  
PR  
SU  
PHONO  
Center  
(GAME/TV)  
(CD)  
GND  
SURR BACK  
Bi-AMP  
R
ZONE2  
R
FRONT  
R
R
SURR  
L
L
OUT  
Surround left  
FRONT  
R
(BTL)  
FRONT  
L
(BTL)  
Surround right  
Surround back*  
Surround back left  
Surround back right  
LINE INPUT  
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT  
* If you’re using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the  
Attaching the Speaker Labels  
No matter how many speakers you use, a powered sub-  
woofer is recommended for a powerful and solid bass.  
The AV receiver’s positive (+) speaker terminals are  
color-coded for ease of identification. (The negative (–)  
speaker terminals are all black.)  
To get the best from your surround-sound system, you  
must set the speaker settings. You can do this automati-  
cally (see page 55) or manually (see page 86).  
Speaker terminal  
Front left, Zone 2 left  
Front right, Zone 2 right  
Center  
Color  
White  
Red  
Using Dipole Speakers  
Green  
Blue  
You can use dipole speakers for the surround left and  
right and surround back left and right speakers. Dipole  
speakers output the same sound in two directions.  
Surround left  
Surround right  
Gray  
Brown  
Tan  
Surround back left  
Surround back right  
Dipole speakers typically have an arrow printed on them to  
indicate how they should be positioned. The surround left  
and right dipole speakers should be positioned so that their  
arrows point toward your TV or screen, while the surround  
back left and right dipolar speakers should be positioned  
so that their arrows point toward each other, as shown.  
The supplied speaker labels are also color-coded and you  
should attach them to the positive (+) side of each  
speaker cable in accordance with the above table.All you  
need to do then is to match the color of each label to the  
corresponding speaker terminal.  
Normal speakers  
Dipole speakers  
1
TV/screen  
1
TV/screen  
4
2
3
4
2
3
5
6
5
6
7
8
7
8
1. Subwoofer  
2. Front left speaker  
3. Center speaker  
6. Surround right speaker  
7. Surround back left  
speaker  
4. Front right speaker  
5. Surround left speaker  
8. Surround back right  
speaker  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
ConnectingYour Speakers—Continued  
Speaker Connection Precautions  
• Unnecessarily long or very thin speaker cables may  
affect the sound quality and should be avoided.  
You can connect speakers with an impedance of  
between 4 and 16 ohms. If the impedance of any of the  
connected speakers is 4 ohms or more but less than 6,  
be sure to set the speaker impedance to 4 ohms (see  
page 45). If you use speakers with a lower impedance,  
and use the amplifier at high volume levels for a long  
period of time, the built-in amp protection circuit may  
be activated.  
• Be careful not to short the  
positive and negative wires.  
Doing so may damage the AV  
receiver.  
• Don’t connect more than one  
cable to each speaker termi-  
nal. Doing so may damage the  
AV receiver.  
• Disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet before  
making any connections.  
• Don’t connect a speaker to several terminals.  
• Read the instructions supplied with your speakers.  
• Pay close attention to speaker wiring polarity. Connect  
positive (+) terminals to only positive (+) terminals,  
and negative (–) terminals to only negative (–) termi-  
nals. If you get them the wrong way around, the sound  
will be out of phase and will sound unnatural.  
Connecting the Speaker Cables  
Strip about 5/8" (15  
mm) of insulation from  
the ends of the  
Fully insert the bare wire.  
5/8" (15 mm)  
1
3
speaker cables, and  
twist the bare wires  
tightly, as shown.  
Screw the terminal tight.  
4
Unscrew the terminal.  
2
The following illustration shows which speaker should be connected to each pair of terminals.  
If you’re using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURR BACK L terminals.  
Front right speaker  
Center speaker  
Front left speaker  
HDMI  
ASSIGNABLE  
AC INLET  
RS232  
IN  
4
IN  
3
IN  
2
IN  
1
OUT  
ANTENNA  
ASSIGNABLE  
MONITOR  
OUT  
AM  
FM75  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
IN IN IN 1(DVD)  
3
2
Y
MONITOR  
OUT  
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
DVD  
IR  
IN  
V
REMOTE  
C
B/PB  
ZONE  
OUT  
2
SURR BACK R  
Bi-AMP  
SURR BACK L  
V
S
CONTROL  
12V TRIGGER  
OUT ZONE  
FRONT R  
SURR R  
CENTER  
SURR L  
FRONT L  
Bi-AMP  
DIGITAL ASSIGNABLE  
COAXIAL  
2
IN  
1
(DVD)  
CR/PR  
S
OUT  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
FRONT CENTER  
SURR SURR BACK FRONT CENTER SURR  
SURR BACK ZONE  
2
ZONE  
3
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
2
3
1
2
(VCR/DVR)  
L
L
L
(CBL/SAT)  
-
R
R
R
OPTICAL  
SUBWOOFER  
CENTER  
CD  
TAPE  
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SA  
T
VCR/DVR  
SURR  
DVD  
MULTI CH  
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT  
FRONT  
PRE OUT  
PHONO  
(GAME/TV)  
(CD)  
GND  
SURR BACK  
Bi-AMP  
R
SURR BACK  
Bi-AMP  
L
ZONE2  
R
FRONT  
R
R
SURR  
L
L
NE2  
L
OUT  
FRONT  
R
(BTL)  
FRONT  
L
(BTL)  
Surround back  
right speaker  
Surround right  
speaker  
Surround left  
speaker  
Surround back  
left speaker  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
ConnectingYour Speakers—Continued  
Bi-amping Speaker Hookup  
Bi-amping the Front Speakers  
The FRONT L/R and SURR BACK L/R terminal posts  
can be used with front speakers and surround back  
speakers respectively, or bi-amped to provide separate  
tweeter and woofer feeds for a pair of front speakers that  
support bi-amping, providing improved bass and treble  
performance.  
Connect the AV receiver’s FRONT R positive (+)  
1
terminal to the right speaker’s positive (+) tweeter  
(high) terminal. And connect the AV receiver’s  
FRONT R negative (–) terminal to the right  
speaker’s negative (–) tweeter (high) terminal.  
• When bi-amping is used, the AV receiver is able to  
drive up to 5.1 speakers in the main room.  
Connect the AV receiver’s SURR BACK R posi-  
2
tive (+) terminal to the right speaker’s positive (+)  
woofer (low) terminal. And connect the AV  
receiver’s SURR BACK R negative (–) terminal to  
the right speaker’s negative (–) woofer (low) ter-  
minal.  
• For bi-amping, the FRONT L/R terminal posts con-  
nect to the front speakers’ tweeter terminals. And the  
speakers’ woofer terminals.  
• Once you’ve completed the bi-amping connections  
shown below and turned on the AV receiver, you must  
set the Speaker Type setting to Bi-Amp to enable bi-  
amping (see page 45).  
Connect the AV receiver’s FRONT L positive (+)  
3
terminal to the left speaker’s positive (+) tweeter  
(high) terminal. And connect the AV receiver’s  
FRONT L negative (–) terminal to the left  
speaker’s negative (–) tweeter (high) terminal.  
Important:  
• When making the bi-amping connections, be sure  
to remove the jumper bars that link the speakers’  
tweeter (high) and woofer (low) terminals.  
Connect the AV receiver’s SURR BACK L posi-  
4
tive (+) terminal to the left speaker’s positive (+)  
woofer (low) terminal. And connect the AV  
receiver’s SURR BACK L negative (–) terminal to  
the left speaker’s negative (–) woofer (low) ter-  
minal.  
• Bi-amping can only be used with speakers that support  
bi-amping. Refer to your speaker manual.  
• Use only front speakers with an impedance of 8 ohms  
or higher for bi-amping. Failure to do so may seriously  
damage the AV receiver.  
HDMI  
AC INLET  
ASSIGNABLE  
IN  
3
IN  
2
IN  
XM  
1
OUT  
RS232  
ANTENNA  
ASSIGNABLE  
MONITOR  
OUT  
AM  
FM75  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
IN IN IN 1(DVD)  
SIRIUS  
3
2
Y
MONITOR  
OUT  
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
DVD  
IR  
IN  
REMOTE  
CB/PB  
V
S
V
S
CONTROL  
12V TRIGGER  
OUT ZONE  
ASSIGNABLE  
COAXIAL  
DIGITAL  
2
IN  
1
(DVD)  
CR/PR  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
FRONT CENTER  
SURR SURR BACK FRONT CENTER SURR  
SURR BACK ZONE  
2
ZONE  
3
(VCR/DVR)  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
2
3
1
2
L
L
L
AC OUTLET  
AC 120V 60Hz  
SWITCHED  
120W 1A MAX.  
(CBL/SAT)  
R
R
R
OPTICAL  
SUBWOOFER  
CENTER  
CD  
TAPE  
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
SURR  
DVD  
MULTI CH  
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT  
FRONT  
PRE OUT  
PHONO  
(GAME/TV)  
(CD)  
GND  
SURR BACK  
Bi-AMP  
R
SURR BACK  
Bi-AMP  
L
ZONE2  
R
FRONT  
R
R
SURR  
L
L
ZONE2  
L
OUT  
SURR BACK R  
Bi-AMP  
SURR BACK L  
Bi-AMP  
FRONT R  
FRONT L  
Woofer (low)  
Tweeter (high)  
Right speaker  
Left speaker  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
ConnectingYour Speakers—Continued  
Bridged Speaker Hookup  
Bridging the Front Speakers  
(TX-SR875 only)  
Connect the AV receiver’s FRONT R positive (+)  
The FRONT L/R and SURR BACK L/R terminal posts  
can be used with front speakers and surround back  
speakers respectively, or bridged together to provide  
almost double the output power for the front speakers.  
1
terminal to the right speaker’s positive (+) ter-  
minal. And connect the AV receiver’s SURR  
BACK R positive (+) terminal to the right  
speaker’s negative terminal.  
• When bridging is used, the AV receiver is able to drive  
2 speakers in the main room (2.1 speakers if you’re  
using a powered subwoofer).  
Connect the AV receiver’s FRONT L positive (+)  
2
terminal to the left speaker’s positive (+) terminal.  
And connect the AV receiver’s SURR BACK L  
positive (+) terminal to the left speaker’s negative  
terminal.  
• For bridging, the positive (+) FRONT L/R and SURR  
BACK L/R terminal posts are used, but the negative  
(–) FRONT L/R and SURR BACK L/R terminals are  
not.  
• Once you’ve completed the bridging connections  
shown below and turned on the AV receiver, you must  
set the Speaker Type setting to BTL to enable bridging  
(see page 45).  
Notes:  
• Use only front speakers with an impedance of 8  
ohms or higher for bridging. Failure to do so may  
seriously damage the AV receiver.  
• When using bridging, make sure that your front speak-  
ers can handle the additional power.  
HDMI  
AC INLET  
ASSIGNABLE  
IN  
4
IN  
3
IN  
2
IN  
XM  
1
OUT  
RS232  
ANTENNA  
ASSIGNABLE  
MONITOR  
OUT  
AM  
FM75  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
IN IN IN 1(DVD)  
SIRIUS  
3
2
Y
MONITOR  
OUT  
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
DVD  
IR  
V
IN  
REMOTE  
CB/PB  
ZONE  
OUT  
2
V
S
CONTROL  
12V TRIGGER  
OUT ZONE  
ASSIGNABLE  
COAXIAL  
DIGITAL  
2
IN  
1
(DVD)  
CR/PR  
S
OUT  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
FRONT CENTER  
SURR SURR BACK FRONT CENTER SURR  
SURR BACK ZONE  
2
ZONE  
3
(VCR/DVR)  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
2
3
1
2
L
L
L
AC OUTLET  
AC 120V 60Hz  
SWITCHED  
(CBL/SAT)  
R
R
R
120W 1A MAX.  
OPTICAL  
SUBWOOFER  
CENTER  
CD  
TAPE  
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
SURR  
DVD  
MULTI CH  
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT  
FRONT  
PRE OUT  
PHONO  
(GAME/TV)  
(CD)  
GND  
SURR BACK  
Bi-AMP  
R
SURR BACK  
Bi-AMP  
L
ZONE2  
R
FRONT  
R
R
SURR  
L
L
ZONE2  
L
OUT  
(BTL)  
(BTL)  
FRONT  
R
FRONT  
L
SURR BACK R  
Bi-AMP  
SURR BACK L  
Bi-AMP  
FRONT R  
FRONT L  
(BTL)  
(BTL)  
FRONT L  
FRONT R  
Right speaker  
Left speaker  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Connecting Antennas  
This section explains how to connect the supplied indoor  
FM antenna and AM loop antenna, and how to connect  
commercially available outdoor FM and AM antennas.  
If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied  
indoor FM antenna, try a commercially available out-  
door FM antenna instead (see page 26).  
The AV receiver won’t pick up any radio signals without  
any antenna connected, so you must connect the antenna  
to use the tuner.  
Connecting the AM Loop Antenna  
AM antenna push terminals  
The supplied indoor AM loop antenna is for indoor use  
only.  
ANTENNA  
AM  
FM75  
Assemble the AM loop antenna, inserting  
the tabs into the base, as shown.  
1
FM antenna jack  
Connecting the Indoor FM Antenna  
Connect both wires of the AM loop  
antenna to the AM push terminals, as  
shown.  
2
The supplied indoor FM antenna is for indoor use only.  
(The antenna’s wires are not polarity sensitive, so  
they can be connected either way around).  
Attach the FM antenna, as shown.  
1
American Model  
Make sure that the wires are attached securely and  
that the push terminals are gripping the bare  
wires, not the insulation.  
FM75  
Insert the plug fully  
into the jack.  
Other Models  
Push  
Insert wire  
Release  
FM75  
Insert the plug fully  
into the jack.  
Once your AV receiver is ready for use, you’ll  
need to tune into an FM radio station and adjust  
the position of the FM antenna to achieve the best  
possible reception.  
Once your AV receiver is ready for use, you’ll  
need to tune into an AM radio station and adjust  
the position of theAM antenna to achieve the best  
possible reception.  
Use thumbtacks or something similar to  
2
Keep the antenna as far away as possible from  
your AV receiver, TV, speaker cables, and power  
cords.  
fix the FM antenna into position.  
If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied  
indoor AM loop antenna, try using it with a commer-  
cially available outdoor AM antenna (see page 26).  
Thumbtacks, etc.  
Caution: Be careful that you don’t injure yourself  
when using thumbtacks.  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Connecting Antennas—Continued  
Connecting an Outdoor FM Antenna  
Connecting an Outdoor AM Antenna  
If you cannot achieve good reception with the supplied  
indoor FM antenna, try a commercially available out-  
door FM antenna instead.  
If good reception cannot be achieved using the supplied  
AM loop antenna, an outdoorAM antenna can be used in  
addition to the loop antenna, as shown.  
Outdoor antenna  
FM 75  
Insulated antenna cable  
AM loop antenna  
Notes:  
• Outdoor FM antennas work best outside, but usable  
results can sometimes be obtained when installed in an  
attic or loft.  
OutdoorAM antennas work best when installed horizon-  
tally outside, but good results can sometimes be obtained  
indoors by mounting horizontally above a window. Note  
that the AM loop antenna should be left connected.  
• For best results, install the outdoor FM antenna well  
away from tall buildings, preferably with a clear line  
of sight to your local FM transmitter.  
Outdoor antenna must be grounded in accordance with  
local regulations to prevent electrical shock hazards.  
• Outdoor antenna should be located away from possi-  
ble noise sources, such as neon signs, busy roads, etc.  
• For safety reasons, outdoor antenna should be situated  
well away from power lines and other high-voltage  
equipment.  
• Outdoor antenna must be grounded in accordance  
with local regulations to prevent electrical shock haz-  
ards.  
Using a TV/FM Antenna Splitter  
It’s best not to use the same antenna for both FM and TV  
reception, as this can cause interference problems. If cir-  
cumstances demand it, use a TV/FM antenna splitter, as  
shown.  
TV/FM antenna splitter  
To AV receiver  
To TV (or VCR)  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
ConnectingYour Components  
AV Connection Color Coding  
About AV Connections  
RCA-type AV connections are usually color coded: red,  
white, and yellow. Use red plugs to connect right-  
channel audio inputs and outputs (typically labeled “R”).  
Use white plugs to connect left-channel audio inputs and  
outputs (typically labeled “L”). And use yellow plugs to  
connect composite video inputs and outputs.  
• Before making any AV connections, read the manuals  
supplied with your other AV components.  
• Don’t connect the power cord until you’ve completed  
and double-checked all AV connections.  
Optical Digital Jacks  
Analog audio  
Left (white)  
Right (red)  
Left (white)  
Right (red)  
The AV receiver’s optical digital jacks have shutter-type  
covers that open when an optical plug is inserted and  
close when it’s removed. Push plugs in all the way.  
Composite video  
(Yellow)  
(Yellow)  
Right!  
Caution: To prevent shutter damage, hold the optical  
plug straight when inserting and removing.  
• Push plugs in all the way to make  
good connections (loose connec-  
tions can cause noise or malfunc-  
tions).  
• To prevent interference, keep  
audio and video cables away from  
power cords and speaker cables.  
Wrong!  
AV Cables and Jacks  
Video  
Cable  
Jack  
Description  
HDMI connections can carry uncompressed stan-  
dard- or high-definition digital video and audio and  
offer the best picture and sound quality.  
HDMI  
HDMI  
Y
P
P
Y
Component video separates the luminance (Y) and  
color difference signals (PR, PB), providing the best  
picture quality. (Some TV manufacturers label their  
component video jacks slightly differently.)  
Y
Component  
video cable  
B
R
P
B
R
C
C
B/PB  
P
R/PR  
S-Video separates the luminance and color signals  
and provides better picture quality than composite  
video.  
S
S-Video cable  
Composite video is commonly used on TVs, VCRs,  
and other video equipment.  
Composite  
video cable  
V
Audio  
This offers the best sound quality and allows you to  
enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS. The audio quality is  
the same as for coaxial.  
OPTICAL  
COAXIAL  
Optical digital  
audio cable  
This offers the best sound quality and allows you to  
enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS. The audio quality is  
the same as for optical.  
Coaxial digital  
audio cable  
This cable carries analog audio. It’s the most  
common connection format for analog audio and  
can be found on virtually all AV components.  
L
Analog audio  
cable (RCA)  
R
This cable carries multichannel analog audio and is  
typically used to connect DVD players with a 7.1-  
channel analog audio output. Several standard  
analog audio cables can be used instead of a multi-  
channel cable.  
FRONT CENTER  
SURR SURR BACK  
Multichannel  
analog audio  
cable (RCA)  
SUBWOOFER  
MULTI CH  
Note: The AV receiver does not support SCART connections.  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
ConnectingYour Components—Continued  
Connecting Audio and Video Signals to the AV Receiver  
By connecting both the audio and video outputs of your DVD player and other AV components to the AV receiver, you  
can switch the audio and video signals simultaneously simply by changing the input source on the AV receiver.  
: Signal Flow  
Video  
Video  
Audio  
Audio  
TV, projector,  
etc.  
DVD player, etc.  
Speakers (see page 22 for hookup details)  
Which Connections Should I Use?  
The AV receiver supports several connection formats for compatibility with a wide range of AV equipment. The format  
you choose will depend on the formats supported by your other components. Use the following sections as a guide.  
For video components, you must make an audio connection and a video connection.  
Video Connection Formats  
Video equipment can be connected to the AV receiver by using any one of the following video connection formats:  
composite video, S-Video, component video, or HDMI, the latter offering the best picture quality.  
The AV receiver can upconvert and downconvert between video formats, depending on the HDMI Monitor setting,  
which generally determines whether video signals are upconverted for the component video output or the HDMI output.  
For optimal video performance, THX recommends that video signals pass through the system without upconver-  
sion (e.g., component video input through to component video output). It’s also recommended that you set the  
Immediate Display preference to Off (page 97).  
HDMI Monitor Setting Set toYes  
With the HDMI Monitor setting set toYes (see  
page 46), video input signals flow through the  
AV receiver as shown, with composite video,  
Video Signal Flow Chart  
DVD player, etc.  
S-Video, and component video sources all  
being upconverted for the HDMI output. Use  
this setting if you connect the AV receiver’s  
Composite  
S-Video  
Component  
HDMI  
HDMI OUT to your TV.  
IN  
The composite video, S-Video, and component  
video outputs pass through their respective  
input signals as they are.  
AV receiver  
MONITOR OUT  
Composite  
S-Video  
Component  
HDMI  
TV, projector, etc.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
ConnectingYour Components—Continued  
HDMI Monitor Setting Set to No  
With the HDMI Monitor setting set to No (see  
page 46), video input signals flow through the  
AV receiver as shown, with composite video  
and S-Video sources being upconverted for the  
component video output. Use this setting if you  
connect the AV receiver’s COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT to your TV.  
Video Signal Flow Chart  
DVD player, etc.  
Composite  
S-Video  
Component  
HDMI  
HDMI  
IN  
Composite video is upconverted to S-Video  
and S-Video is downconverted to composite  
video. Note that these conversions only apply  
to the MONITOR OUT V and S outputs, not  
the VCR/DVR OUT V and S outputs.  
AV receiver  
MONITOR OUT  
S-Video  
Composite  
Component  
The composite video, S-Video, and component  
video pass through their respective input sig-  
nals as they are.  
On the TX-SR875, this signal flow also applies  
when the Monitor Out Resolution setting is set  
to Through (see page 46).  
TV, projector, etc.  
Video Signal Flow and the Resolution Setting  
On the TX-SR875, when the HDMI Monitor  
setting is set to No (see page 46), if the Monitor  
Out Resolution setting is set to anything other  
than Through (see page 46), the video signal  
flow will be as shown here, with composite  
video and S-Video sources being upconverted  
for the component video output.  
Video Signal Flow Chart  
DVD player, etc.  
Composite  
S-Video  
Component  
HDMI  
IN  
The composite video, S-Video, and component  
video outputs pass through their respective  
analog input signals as they are. HDMI input  
signals are not output.  
AV receiver  
MONITOR OUT  
Composite  
S-Video  
Component  
TV, projector, etc.  
Audio Connection Formats  
Audio equipment can be connected to the AV  
receiver by using any of the following audio  
connection formats: analog, optical, coaxial,  
analog multichannel, or HDMI.  
Audio Signal Flow Chart  
DVD player, etc.  
When choosing a connection format, bear in  
mind that the AV receiver does not convert dig-  
ital input signals for analog line outputs and  
vice versa. For example, audio signals con-  
nected to an optical or coaxial digital input are  
not output by the analog TAPE OUT.  
HDMI  
Optical Coaxial Analog Multichannel  
AV receiver  
HDMI  
Optical  
Analog  
1
2
Depends on the HDMI Audio setting (see page 99).  
Only the front L/R channels are output.  
*
*
MD recorder, etc.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ConnectingYour Components—Continued  
Connecting a TV or Projector  
Step 1:Video Connection  
Choose a video connection that matches your TV (  
,
, or ), and then make the connection.  
A
B
C
Step 2: Audio Connection  
Choose an audio connection that matches your TV (  
,
, or ), and then make the connection.  
a
b
c
• With connection , you can listen to and record audio from your TV or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.  
a
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection or . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use  
b
c
and , or and .)  
a
b
a
c
Connection  
AV receiver  
Signal flow  
TV  
Picture quality  
Best  
COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT  
MONITOR OUT S  
Component video input  
S-Video input  
A
B
C
a
Better  
MONITOR OUT V  
Composite video input  
Analog audio L/R output  
Digital coaxial output  
Digital optical output  
Standard  
GAME/TV IN L/R  
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2  
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 2  
b
c
RS232  
ANTENNA  
AM  
ASSIGNABLE  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
MONITOR  
IN 3  
IN 2  
IN 1(DVD)  
OUT  
Y
C
B
MONITOR  
DVD  
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
IR  
OUT  
V
IN  
C
C
B/PB  
REMOTE  
ONE  
OUT  
2
V
S
CONTROL  
ASSIGNABLE  
COAXIAL  
DIGITAL  
IN 1  
(DVD)  
R/PR  
S
b
c
OUT  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
FRONT CENTER  
SURR  
(VCR/DVR)  
IN 2  
IN 3  
IN 1  
IN 2  
OUT  
L
L
(CBL/SAT)  
R
R
OPTICAL  
SUBWOOFER  
CENTER  
PHONO  
MULTI CH  
CD  
TAPE  
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
FRONT R  
VCR/DVR  
SURR R  
DVD  
a
(GAME/TV)  
(CD)  
GND  
SURR BACK R  
Bi-AMP  
ZONE2 R  
(BTL)  
FRONT R  
A
L
R
COAXIAL  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
OUT  
Y
PB  
PR  
AUDIO  
OUT  
S VIDEO  
IN  
VIDEO  
IN  
COMPONENT VIDEO IN  
Connect one  
or the other  
TV, projector,  
etc.  
If your TV has no audio outputs, connect an audio output from your VCR or cable or satellite  
receiver to the AV receiver and use its tuner to listen to TV programs through the AV receiver (see  
pages 33 and 35).  
Hint!  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ConnectingYour Components—Continued  
Connecting a DVD player  
Step 1:Video Connection  
Choose a video connection that matches your DVD player (  
,
, or ), and then make the connection.  
A
B
C
If you use connection , you must connect the AV receiver to your TV with the same type of connection.  
A
Step 2: Audio Connection  
Choose an audio connection that matches your DVD player (  
,
, or ), and then make the connection.  
a
b
c
• With connection , you can listen to and record audio from a DVD or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.  
a
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection or . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use  
b
c
and , or and .)  
a
b
a
c
• If your DVD player has main left and right outputs and multichannel left and right outputs, be sure to use the  
main left and right outputs for connection  
.
a
Connection  
AV receiver  
Signal flow  
DVD player  
Picture quality  
Best  
COMPONENT VIDEO IN 1  
DVD IN S  
Component video output  
S-Video output  
A
B
C
a
Better  
DVD IN V  
Composite video output  
Analog audio L/R output  
Digital coaxial output  
Digital optical output  
Standard  
DVD IN L/R  
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 1  
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1  
b
c
RS232  
ANTENNA  
AM  
ASSIGNABLE  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
MONITOR  
IN 3  
IN 2  
IN 1(DVD)  
OUT  
Y
MONITOR  
DVD  
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
IR  
OUT  
C
B
V
IN  
C
C
B/PB  
REMOTE  
ZONE  
OUT  
2
V
CONTROL  
b
ASSIGNABLE  
COAXIAL  
DIGITAL  
IN 1  
(DVD)  
S
R/PR  
S
OUT  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
FRONT CENTER  
SURR  
(VCR/DVR)  
IN 2  
IN 3  
IN 1  
IN 2  
OUT  
L
L
(CBL/SAT)  
R
R
c
OPTICAL  
SUBWOOFER  
CENTER  
PHONO  
MULTI CH  
CD  
TAPE  
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
FRONT R  
VCR/DVR  
SURR R  
DVD  
a
(GAME/TV)  
(CD)  
GND  
SURR BACK R  
Bi-AMP  
ZONE2 R  
A
(BTL)  
FRONT R  
L
R
COAXIAL  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
OUT  
Y
PB  
PR  
AUDIO  
OUT  
S VIDEO  
OUT  
VIDEO  
OUT  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
Connect one  
or the other  
DVD player  
To connect a DVD player or DVD-Audio/SACD-capable player with a  
multichannel analog audio output, see page 32.  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ConnectingYour Components—Continued  
Hooking Up the Multichannel Input  
If your DVD player supports multichannel audio formats such as DVD-Audio and SACD, and it has a multichannel  
analog audio output, you can connect it to the AV receiver’s multichannel input.  
Use a multichannel analog audio cable, or several normal audio cables, to connect the AV receiver’s MULTI CH FRONT  
DVD player. If your DVD player has a 5.1-channel analog audio output, don’t connect anything to the AV receiver’s  
SURR BACK L/R jacks.  
Before using the multichannel input, you must assign it to an input selector. See “Analog Input Setup” on page 54. To  
select the multichannel input, see “Selecting Audio Inputs” on page 70. To adjust the subwoofer sensitivity for the  
multichannel input, see “Subwoofer Input Sensitivity” on page 99.  
HDMI  
ASSIGNABLE  
IN  
3
IN  
2
IN  
1
OUT  
RS232  
ANTENNA  
ASSIGNABLE  
MONITOR  
OUT  
AM  
F
COMPONENT VIDEO  
IN IN IN 1(DVD)  
3
2
Y
7.1 ch  
5.1 ch  
MONITOR  
OUT  
DVD  
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
IR  
IN  
V
REMOTE  
C
C
B/PB  
ZONE  
OUT  
2
V
S
CONTROL  
ASSIGNABLE  
COAXIAL  
DIGITAL  
IN  
1
(DVD)  
R/PR  
S
OUT  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
FRONT CENTER  
SURR SURR BACK  
(VCR/DVR)  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
2
3
1
2
FRONT  
CENTER  
SURR  
SURR BACK  
L
L
L
(CBL/SAT)  
R
R
OPTICAL  
L
SUBWOOFER  
CENTER  
PHONO  
CD  
TAPE  
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
SURR  
DVD  
MULTI CH  
(GAME/TV)  
(CD)  
GND  
SURR BACK  
Bi-AMP  
R
ZONE2  
R
FRONT  
R
R
SURR  
R
R
SUBWOOFER  
OUT  
MULTI CH  
(BTL)  
FRONT  
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
FRONT  
CENTER  
SUB  
WOOFER  
SURROUND  
SURR  
BACK  
DVD player  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ConnectingYour Components—Continued  
Connecting a VCR or DVR for Playback  
With this hookup, you can use the tuner in your VCR or DVR to listen to your favorite TV programs  
via the AV receiver, which is useful if your TV has no audio outputs.  
Hint!  
Step 1:Video Connection  
Choose a video connection that matches your VCR or DVR (  
,
, or ), and then make the connection. If you use  
A
B
C
connection , you must connect the AV receiver to your TV with the same type of connection.  
A
Step 2: Audio Connection  
Choose an audio connection that matches your VCR or DVR (  
,
, or ), and then make the connection.  
a
b
c
• With connection , you can listen to the VCR or DVR in Zone 2 or Zone 3.  
a
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection or . (To listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use and  
b
c
a
, or and .)  
b
a
c
Connection  
AV receiver  
COMPONENT VIDEO IN 2  
VCR/DVR IN S  
Signal flow  
VCR or DVR  
Picture quality  
Best  
Component video output  
S-Video output  
A
B
C
a
Better  
VCR/DVR IN V  
Composite video output  
Analog audio L/R output  
Digital coaxial output  
Digital optical output  
Standard  
VCR/DVR IN L/R  
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2  
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1  
b
c
ANTENNA  
AM  
ASSIGNABLE  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
MONITOR  
IN 3  
IN 2  
IN 1(DVD)  
OUT  
Y
MONITOR  
C
B
DVD  
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
V
VCR/DVR  
IR  
OUT  
V
IN  
C
C
B/PB  
REMOTE  
ZONE  
OUT  
2
CONTROL  
ASSIGNABLE  
COAXIAL  
DIGITAL  
IN 1  
(DVD)  
S
R/PR  
S
OUT  
b
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
FRONT CENTER  
SURR  
(VCR/DVR)  
IN 2  
IN 3  
IN 1  
IN 2  
OUT  
L
L
(CBL/SAT)  
R
R
OPTICAL  
SUBWOOFER  
CENTER  
PHONO  
MULTI CH  
CD  
TAPE  
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
FRONT R  
VCR/DVR  
SURR R  
DVD  
a
(GAME/TV)  
(CD)  
GND  
SURR BACK R  
Bi-AMP  
ZONE2 R  
c
A
(BTL)  
FRONT R  
L
R
COAXIAL  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
OUT  
Y
PB  
PR  
AUDIO  
OUT  
S VIDEO  
OUT  
VIDEO  
OUT  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
Connect one  
or the other  
VCR or DVR  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ConnectingYour Components—Continued  
Connecting a VCR or DVR for Recording  
Step 1:Video Connection  
Choose a video connection that matches your VCR or DVR ( or ), and then make the connection. The video  
A
B
source to be recorded must be connected to the AV receiver via the same type of connection.  
Step 2: Audio Connection  
Choose an audio connection that matches your VCR or DVR ( or ), and then make the connection.  
a
b
Connection  
AV receiver  
VCR/DVR OUT S  
Signal flow  
VCR or DVD recorder  
Picture quality  
Better  
S-Video input  
Composite video input  
Audio L/R input  
A
B
a
VCR/DVR OUT V  
Standard  
VCR/DVR OUT L/R  
DIGITAL OPTICAL OUT  
Digital optical input  
b
RS232  
ANTENNA  
AM  
ASSIGNABLE  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
MONITOR  
IN 3  
IN 2  
IN 1(DVD)  
OUT  
Y
MONITOR  
B
A
DVD  
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
IR  
OUT  
V
IN  
C
C
B/PB  
REMOTE  
ZONE  
OUT  
2
V
S
CONTROL  
ASSIGNABLE  
COAXIAL  
DIGITAL  
IN 1  
(DVD)  
R/PR  
S
OUT  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
FRONT CENTER  
SURR  
(VCR/DVR)  
IN 2  
IN 3  
IN 1  
IN 2  
OUT  
L
L
(CBL/SAT)  
R
R
OPTICAL  
SUBWOOFER  
CENTER  
PHONO  
MULTI CH  
CD  
TAPE  
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
FRONT R  
VCR/DVR  
SURR R  
DVD  
a
(GAME/TV)  
(CD)  
GND  
SURR BACK R  
Bi-AMP  
ZONE2 R  
b
(BTL)  
FRONT R  
L
R
OPTICAL  
IN  
AUDIO  
IN  
S VIDEO  
IN  
VIDEO  
IN  
VCR or DVR  
Notes:  
• The AV receiver must be turned on for recording. Recording is not possible while it’s on Standby.  
• If you want to record directly from your TV or another video source without going through the AV receiver, connect  
the audio and video outputs from your TV or other video component directly to the recording VCR/DVR’s audio and  
video inputs. See the manuals supplied with your TV or VCR/DVR for details.  
• Video signals connected to composite video inputs can only be recorded via the VCR/DVR OUT V jack. So if your  
source TV or VCR is connected to a composite video input, the recording VCR/DVR must be connected to the  
VCR/DVR OUTV jack. Likewise, video signals connected to S-Video inputs can only be recorded via theVCR/DVR  
OUT S jack. So if your source TV or VCR is connected to an S-Video input, the recording VCR/DVR must be  
connected to the VCR/DVR OUT S jack.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ConnectingYour Components—Continued  
Connecting a Satellite, Cable, or Terrestrial Set-top box or Other Video Source  
With this hookup, you can use your satellite or cable receiver to listen to your favorite TV programs  
via the AV receiver, which is useful if your TV has no audio outputs.  
Hint!  
Step 1:Video Connection  
Choose a video connection that matches the video source (  
,
, or ), and then make the connection.  
A
B
C
If you use connection , you must connect the AV receiver to your TV with the same type of connection.  
A
Step 2: Audio Connection  
Choose an audio connection that matches the video source (  
,
, or ), and then make the connection.  
a
b
c
• With connection , you can listen to and record audio from the video source or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.  
a
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection or . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use  
b
c
and , or and .)  
a
b
a
c
Connection  
AV receiver  
Signal flow  
Video source  
Component video output  
S-Video output  
Picture quality  
Best  
COMPONENT VIDEO 3 IN  
CBL/SAT IN S  
A
B
C
a
Better  
CBL/SAT IN V  
Composite video output  
Analog audio L/R output  
Digital coaxial output  
Digital optical output  
Standard  
CBL/SAT IN L/R  
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 3  
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 2  
b
c
RS232  
ANTENNA  
ASSIGNABLE  
AM  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
MONITOR  
OUT  
IN 3  
IN 2  
IN 1(DVD)  
Y
MONITOR  
OUT  
C
DVD  
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
IR  
V
IN  
C
C
B/PB  
REMOTE  
ZONE  
OUT  
2
V
S
CONTROL  
ASSIGNABLE  
COAXIAL  
DIGITAL  
IN 1  
(DVD)  
R/PR  
S
OUT  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
FRONT CENTER  
SURR  
B
(VCR/DVR)  
IN 2  
IN 3  
IN 1  
IN 2  
OUT  
L
L
b
c
(CBL/SAT)  
R
R
OPTICAL  
SUBWOOFER  
CENTER  
PHONO  
MULTI CH  
CD  
TAPE  
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
FRONT R  
VCR/DVR  
SURR R  
DVD  
a
(GAME/TV)  
(CD)  
GND  
SURR BACK R  
Bi-AMP  
ZONE2 R  
(BTL)  
FRONT R  
A
L
R
COAXIAL  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
OUT  
Y
PB  
PR  
AUDIO  
OUT  
S VIDEO  
OUT  
VIDEO  
OUT  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
Connect one  
or the other  
Satellite, cable, set-top box, etc.  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ConnectingYour Components—Continued  
Connecting Components with HDMI  
About HDMI  
Designed to meet the increased demands of digital TV, HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) is a new digital  
interface standard for connecting TVs, projectors, DVD players, set-top boxes, and other video components. Until now,  
several separate video and audio cables have been required to connect AV components. With HDMI, a single cable can  
carry control signals, digital video, and up to eight channels of digital audio (2-channel PCM, multichannel digital  
audio, or multichannel PCM).  
*1  
The HDMI video stream (i.e., video signal) is compatible with DVI (Digital Visual Interface), so TVs and displays  
with a DVI input can be connected by using an HDMI-to-DVI adapter cable. (This may not work with some TVs and  
displays, resulting in no picture.)  
The AV receiver uses HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection), so only HDCP-compatible components will  
display a picture.  
The AV receiver’s HDMI interface is based on the following standard:  
High-Definition Multimedia Interface Specification Informational Version 1.3a  
Supported Audio Formats  
• 2-channel linear PCM (32–192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit)  
• Multichannel linear PCM (7.1 ch, 32–192 kHz)  
• Bitstream (Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS, DTS-HD, DTS-HD Master Audio)  
Your DVD player must be able to output these formats from its HDMI OUT.  
About Copyright Protection  
*2  
The AV receiver supports HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection), a copy-protection system for digital  
video signals. Other devices connected to the AV receiver via HDMI must also support HDCP.  
Use a commercially available HDMI cable (supplied with some components) to connect the AV receiver’s HDMI OUT  
to the HDMI input on your TV or projector.  
*1 DVI (Digital Visual Interface): The digital display interface standard set by the DDWG*3 in 1999.  
*2 HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection): The video encryption technology developed by Intel for HDMI/DVI. It’s designed to  
protect video content and requires a HDCP-compatible device to display the encrypted video.  
*3 DDWG (Digital Display Working Group): Lead by Intel, Compaq, Fujitsu, Hewlett Packard, IBM, NEC, and Silicon Image, this open  
industry group’s objective is to address the industry's requirements for a digital connectivity specification for high-performance PCs and  
digital displays.  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ConnectingYour Components—Continued  
Making HDMI Connections  
Step 1: Use HDMI cables to connect the AV receiver’s HDMI jacks to your HDMI-compatible DVD player, TV,  
projector, and so on.  
Step 2: Assign each HDMI IN to an input selector. See “HDMI Input Setup” on page 48.  
Video Signals  
Digital video signals received by the HDMI IN jacks are normally output by the HDMI OUT for display on your TV.  
Composite video, S-Video, and component video sources can be upconverted for the HDMI output. See “Video Con-  
nection Formats” on page 28 for more information.  
Audio Signals  
Digital audio signals received by the HDMI IN jacks are output by the speakers and headphones connected to the AV  
receiver. Normally, they are not output by the HDMI OUT, unless the HDMI Audio Out setting is set to On (see  
page 99).  
To listen to audio received by the HDMI IN jacks through your TV’s speakers, set the HDMI Audio  
Hint!  
Out setting to On (see page 99), and set your DVD player’s HDMI audio output setting to PCM.  
When listening to audio from an HDMI component through the AV receiver’s speakers, set the HDMI  
component so that its video can be seen on your TV (e.g., on your TV, select the input to which the  
HDMI component is connected). If your TV is not turned on or a different input is selected, the AV  
receiver's speakers may produce no sound or the sound may be cut off.  
Note:  
• When the HDMI Audio setting is set to On (see page 99), or TV Control is set to Enable and you’re listening through  
your TV’s speakers, if you turn up the AV receiver’s volume control, the sound will be output by the AV receiver’s  
speakers. To stop the AV receiver’s speakers producing sound, change the settings, change your TV’s settings, or turn  
down the AV receiver’s volume.  
HDMI  
OUT  
HDMI  
IN  
TV  
DVD player  
HDMI  
HDMI  
IN 1  
HDMI  
ASSIGNABLE  
IN 4  
IN 3  
IN 2  
IN 1  
RS232  
OUT  
ANTENNA  
ASSIGNABLE  
AM  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
MONITOR  
IN 3  
IN 2  
IN 1(DVD)  
OUT  
Y
MONITOR  
OUT  
DVD  
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
IR  
V
IN  
C
B/PB  
REMOTE  
ZONE  
OUT  
2
V
S
CONTROL  
ASSIGNABLE  
COAXIAL  
DIGITAL  
IN 1  
(DVD)  
CR/PR  
S
OUT  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
FRONT CENTER  
SURR SUR
(VCR/DVR)  
IN 2  
IN 3  
IN 1  
IN 2  
OUT  
L
L
(CBL/SAT)  
R
R
OPTICAL  
SUBWOOFER  
CENTER  
PHONO  
MULTI CH  
CD  
TAPE  
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
FRONT R  
VCR/DVR  
SURR R  
DVD  
(GAME/TV)  
(CD)  
GND  
SURR BACK R  
Bi-AMP  
ZONE2 R  
(BTL)  
FRONT R  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ConnectingYour Components—Continued  
Connecting a Game Console  
Step 1:Video Connection  
Choose a video connection that matches your game console (  
,
, or ), and then make the connection.  
A
B
C
If you use connection , you must connect the AV receiver to your TV with the same type of connection.  
A
Step 2: Audio Connection  
Choose an audio connection that matches your DVD player (  
,
, or ), and then make the connection.  
a
b
c
• With connection , you can listen to and record audio from your game console or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.  
a
• To enjoy Dolby Digital and DTS, use connection . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well, use  
b
a
and .)  
b
Connection  
AV receiver  
COMPONENT VIDEO IN 3  
GAME/TV IN S  
Signal flow  
Game console  
Component video output  
S-Video output  
Picture quality  
Best  
A
B
C
a
Better  
GAME/TV IN V  
Composite video output  
Analog audio L/R output  
Digital coaxial output  
Standard  
GAME/TV IN L/R  
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 1  
b
RS232  
ANTENNA  
AM  
ASSIGNABLE  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
MONITOR  
IN 3  
IN 2  
IN 1(DVD)  
OUT  
Y
MONITOR  
C
B
DVD  
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
V
VCR/DVR  
IR  
OUT  
V
IN  
C
C
B/PB  
REMOTE  
ZONE  
OUT  
2
CONTROL  
ASSIGNABLE  
COAXIAL  
DIGITAL  
IN 1  
(DVD)  
S
R/PR  
S
OUT  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
FRONT CENTER  
SURR  
(VCR/DVR)  
IN 2  
IN 3  
IN 1  
IN 2  
OUT  
L
L
(CBL/SAT)  
R
R
b
OPTICAL  
SUBWOOFER  
CENTER  
PHONO  
MULTI CH  
CD  
TAPE  
AUX 1 GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
FRONT R  
VCR/DVR  
SURR R  
DVD  
a
(GAME/TV)  
(CD)  
GND  
SURR BACK R  
Bi-AMP  
ZONE2 R  
(BTL)  
FRONT R  
A
L
R
OPTICAL  
OUT  
Y
PB  
PR  
AUDIO  
OUT  
S VIDEO  
OUT  
VIDEO  
OUT  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
Game Console  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ConnectingYour Components—Continued  
Connecting a Camcorder or Other AV Component  
Step 1:Video Connection  
Choose a video connection that matches your camcorder ( or ), and then make the connection.  
A
B
Step 2: Audio Connection  
Choose an audio connection that matches your camcorder ( or ), and then make the connection.  
a
b
MASTER VOLUME  
INPUT  
b
a
DVD  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
GAME/TV  
AUX  
1
AUX  
2
TAPE  
TUNER  
CD  
PHONO  
DISPLAY  
PUSH TO OPEN  
DIGITAL  
TUNING  
PRESET  
RETURN  
LEVEL  
TONE  
HDMI OUT  
STEREO  
THX  
SETUP MIC  
AUX  
2
L
INPUT  
TUNING  
DIMMER MEMORY MODE  
SETUP  
CLEAR  
VIDE
AUDIO  
R
DIGITAL INPUT  
LISTENING MODE  
S
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
ENTER  
TUNING  
L
AUDIO  
INPUT  
R
INPUT  
VIDEO  
INPUT  
S VIDEO  
A
B
VIDEO  
OUT  
L
AUDIO  
OUT  
R
S VIDEO  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
OUT  
Camcorder, etc.  
Connection  
AV receiver  
Signal flow  
Camcorder  
AUX 2 INPUT S VIDEO  
AUX 2 INPUT VIDEO  
AUX 2 INPUT L/R  
S-Video output  
A
B
a
Composite video output  
Analog audio L/R output  
Digital optical output  
AUX 2 INPUT DIGITAL  
b
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
ConnectingYour Components—Continued  
Connecting a CD Player  
Step 1:  
Choose a connection that matches your CD player (  
,
, or ), and then make the connection.  
a
b
c
HDMI  
ASSIGNABLE  
RS232  
IN  
4
IN  
3
IN  
2
IN  
1
OUT  
ANTENNA  
a
ASSIGNABLE  
AM  
FM75  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
MONITOR  
OUT  
IN  
3
IN  
2
IN 1(DVD)  
Y
MONITOR  
OUT  
COAXIAL  
IN 2  
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
DVD  
IR  
IN  
b
c
V
IN  
REMOTE  
C
B/PB  
ZONE  
OUT  
2
V
S
CONTROL  
ASSIGNABLE  
COAXIAL  
DIGITAL  
IN  
1
L
(DVD)  
CR/PR  
S
OUT  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
FRONT CENTER  
SURR
VCR/DVR)  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
2
3
1
2
L
L
R
(CBL/SAT)  
R
R
OPTICAL  
SUBWOOFER  
CENTER  
PHONO  
CD  
TAPE  
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
SURR  
DVD  
MULTI CH  
CD  
(GAME/TV)  
(CD)  
OPTICAL  
IN 2  
GND  
SURR BACK  
Bi-AMP  
R
ZONE2  
R
FRONT  
R
R
SURR  
L
OUT  
(BTL)  
FRONT  
R
L
R
COAXIAL  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
OUT  
AUDIO  
OUT  
Connect one or the other  
CD player  
• With connection , you can listen to and record audio from the CD player or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.  
a
• To connect the CD player digitally, use connection or . (To record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3 as well,  
b
c
use and , or and .)  
a
b
a
c
Connection  
AV receiver  
Signal flow  
CD  
CD IN L/R  
Analog audio L/R output  
Digital coaxial output  
Digital optical output  
a
b
c
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2  
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 2  
Connecting a Turntable  
The AV receiver’s PHONO IN is designed for use with a  
moving magnet (MM) type cartridge.  
HDMI  
ASSIGNABLE  
RS232  
IN  
4
IN  
3
IN  
2
IN  
1
OUT  
Use an analog audio cable to connect the AV receiver’s  
PHONO IN L/R jacks to the audio output on your turn-  
table.  
ANTENNA  
ASSIGNABLE  
MONITOR  
OUT  
AM  
F
COMPONENT VIDEO  
IN IN IN 1(DVD)  
3
2
Y
MONITOR  
OUT  
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
DVD  
IR  
IN  
V
REMOTE  
C
B/PB  
ZONE  
OUT  
2
V
S
CONTROL  
ASSIGNABLE  
COAXIAL  
DIGITAL  
IN  
1
(DVD)  
C
R/PR  
S
OUT  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
FRONT CENTER  
SURR SURR BACK  
(VCR/DVR)  
Notes:  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
2
3
1
2
L
L
(CBL/SAT)  
R
R
• If your turntable has a ground wire, connect it to the  
OPTICAL  
SUBWOOFER  
CENT
PHONO  
CD  
TAPE  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
SURR  
DVD  
MULTI CH  
(GAME/TV)  
(CD)  
GND  
SURR BACK  
Bi-AMP  
R
ZONE2  
R
FRONT  
R
R
IN
AV receiver’s GND screw. With some turntables, con-  
necting the ground wire may produce an audible hum.  
If this happens, disconnect it.  
OUT  
L
(BTL)  
FRONT  
R
R
• If your turntable has a moving coil (MC) type car-  
tridge, you’ll need a commercially available MC head  
amp or MC transformer. Connect your turntable to the  
head amp or transformer, and connect that to the AV  
receiver’s PHONO IN L/R jacks.  
PHONO  
AUDIO  
OUTPUT  
L
You can also use a phono equalizer to connect a turn-  
table with an MC-type cartridge. See your phono  
equalizer’s manual for details.  
R
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
ConnectingYour Components—Continued  
Connecting a Cassette, CDR, MiniDisc, or DAT Recorder  
Step 1:  
Choose a connection that matches your recorder (  
,
,
, or ), and then make the connection.  
a
b
c
d
IN  
a
COAXIAL  
b
HDMI  
ASSIGNABLE  
L
IN 2  
RS232  
IN  
3
IN  
2
IN  
1
OUT  
ANTENNA  
ASSIGNABLE  
MONITOR  
OUT  
AM  
FM
COMPONENT VIDEO  
IN IN IN 1(DVD)  
3
2
R
Y
MONITOR  
OUT  
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
DVD  
IN  
REMOTE  
C
C
B/PB  
V
S
S
TAPE  
CONTROL  
ASSIGNABLE  
COAXIAL  
DIGITAL  
IN  
1
c
OPTICAL  
(DVD)  
R/PR  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
FRONT CENTER  
SURR SURR BACK  
(VCR/DVR)  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
2
3
1
2
L
L
a
IN 2  
(CBL/SAT)  
R
R
L
OPTICAL  
SUBWOOFER  
CENTER  
PHONO  
CD  
TAPE  
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
DVD  
MULTI CH  
(GAME/TV)  
(CD)  
GND  
SURR BACK  
Bi-AMP  
R
ZONE2  
R
FRONT  
R
URR  
R
SURR  
R
OPTICAL  
d
OUT  
TAPE  
L
R
L
R
Connect one  
or the other  
COAXIAL  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
IN  
AUDIO  
IN  
AUDIO  
OUT  
Cassette, CDR, MD, etc.  
• With connection , you can play and record or listen in Zone 2 or Zone 3.  
a
• To connect the recorder digitally for playback, use connections and , or and  
.
a
b
a
c
• To connect the recorder digitally for recording, use connection  
.
d
Connection  
a
AV receiver  
Signal flow  
Cassette, CDR, MD, or DAT recorder  
TAPE IN L/R  
TAPE OUT L/R  
Analog audio L/R output  
Analog audio L/R input  
DIGITAL COAXIAL IN 2  
DIGITAL OPTICAL IN 2  
DIGITAL OPTICAL OUT  
Digital coaxial output  
Digital optical output  
Digital optical input  
b
c
d
Connecting a Power Amplifier  
If you want to use a more powerful power amplifier and  
use the AV receiver solely as a preamp, connect the amp  
to the PRE OUT jacks, and connect all speakers and the  
subwoofer to the power amplifier. If you have a powered  
subwoofer, connect it to the AV receiver’s PRE OUT  
SUBWOOFER jack.  
ANTENNA  
ASSIGNABLE  
MONITOR  
OUT  
AM  
FM75  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
IN IN IN 1(DVD)  
3
2
Y
MONITOR  
OUT  
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
DVD  
IR  
V
IN  
REMOTE  
C
B/PB  
ZONE  
OUT  
2
V
S
CONTROL  
12V TRIGGER  
OUT ZONE  
ASSIGNABLE  
COAXIAL  
DIGITAL  
2
IN  
1
(DVD)  
C
R/PR  
S
OUT  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
FRONT CENTER  
SURR SURR BACK FRONT CENTER SURR  
SURR BACK ZONE  
2
ZONE  
3
VCR/DVR)  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
2
3
1
2
L
L
L
(CBL/SAT)  
R
R
R
OPTICAL  
SUBWOOFER  
CENTER  
PHONO  
CD  
TAPE  
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
SURR  
DVD  
MULTI CH  
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT  
FRONT  
PRE OUT  
(GAME/TV)  
(CD)  
GND  
SURR BACK  
Bi-AMP  
R
SURR BACK  
Bi-AMP  
L
ZONE2  
R
FRONT  
R
R
SURR  
L
L
OUT  
(BTL)  
FRONT  
R
FRONT  
CENTER  
SURR  
SURR BACK  
1. Subwoofer  
6. Surround right speaker  
2. Front left speaker  
3. Center speaker  
4. Front right speaker  
5. Surround left speaker  
7. Surround back left  
speaker  
8. Surround back right  
speaker  
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
FRONT  
CENTER  
SR  
SURR BACK  
SUBWOOFER  
Power amplifier  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
ConnectingYour Components—Continued  
Connecting an RI Dock  
IfYour iPod Supports Video:  
Connect your RI Dock’s audio output jacks to the  
AV receiver’s GAME/TV IN L/R jacks, and connect  
its video output jack to the AV receiver’s GAME/TV  
IN V jack.  
IfYour iPod Doesn’t Support Video:  
Connect your RI Dock’s audio output jacks to the  
AV receiver’s GAME/TV IN L/R jacks.  
(Onkyo DS-A2 hookup shown below.)  
(Onkyo DS-A2 hookup shown below.)  
IN  
HDMI  
ASSIGNABLE  
L
RS232  
IN  
4
IN  
3
IN  
2
IN  
1
GAME/TV  
ASSIGNABLE  
MONITOR  
OUT  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
IN IN IN 1(DVD)  
HDMI  
3
2
ASSIGNABLE  
R
Y
RS232  
IN  
4
IN  
3
IN  
2
I
V
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
REMOTE  
C
B/PB  
GAME/TV  
V
S
ASSIGNABLE  
MONITOR  
OUT  
CONTROL  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
IN IN 1(DVD)  
2
ASSIGNABLE  
COAXIAL  
DIGITAL  
IN  
1
Y
(DVD)  
CR/PR  
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SA  
IN  
IN  
OT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
REMOTE  
C
B/PB  
V
S
(VCR/DVR)  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
2
3
1
2
CONTROL  
L
L
ASSIGNABLE  
COAXIAL  
DIGITAL  
IN  
IN  
1
(DVD)  
(CBL/SAT)  
CR/PR  
R
R
OPTICAL  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
L
PHONO  
CD  
TAPE  
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
(VCR/DVR)  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
2
3
1
2
L
L
(GAME/TV)  
(CD)  
GND  
SURR BACK  
Bi-AMP  
R
ZONE2  
R
FRONT  
R
(CBL/SAT)  
R
R
OPTICAL  
R
PHONO  
CD  
TAPE  
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SA  
OUT  
(GAME/TV)  
(CD)  
GND  
SURR BACK  
Bi-AMP  
R
ZONE2  
R
FRONT  
R
(BTL)  
FRONT  
R
GAME/TV  
OUT  
(BTL)  
FRONT  
R
If you have an Onkyo DS-A1 RI Dock, connect its video  
output jack to the AV receiver’s GAME/TV IN S jack.  
Notes:  
• Connect the RI Dock to the AV receiver with an  
• Set the RI Dock’s RI MODE switch to HDD.  
cable (see page 43).  
• Set the AV receiver’s Input Display to DOCK (see page 51).  
• See the RI Dock’s instruction manual for more information.  
Connecting the Power Cords of Other Components (North American and  
European models only)  
The AV receiver has AC outlets on its rear panel that can be  
AC INLET  
used to connect the power cords of other components that you  
intend to use with the AV receiver. These components can  
then be left turned on so that they turn on and off as and when  
the AV receiver is set to On or Standby.  
AC OUTLET  
AC 120V 60Hz  
SWITCHED  
120W 1A MAX.  
Caution:  
• Make sure that the total capacity of the components that  
you connect to the AC OUTLETS does not exceed the  
AC OUTLET  
stated capacity (e.g., TOTAL 120 W).  
Notes:  
• Onkyo components connected via  
nected directly to a wall outlet, not an AC OUTLET on the  
AV receiver.  
should be con-  
AC OUTLET  
AC 120V 60Hz  
SWITCHED  
50/60Hz  
SWITCHED  
100W 0.45-0.41A MAX.  
AC 220-240V  
120W 1A MAX.  
• The number of AC OUTLETS, socket type, and total  
capacity depends on the country in which you purchased  
the AV receiver.  
European model  
American model  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
ConnectingYour Components—Continued  
Connecting Onkyo  
Components  
Step 1: Make sure that each Onkyo component is connected to the AV receiver with an analog audio cable (RCA).  
Step 2: Make the necessary connections (see illustration below).  
Step 3: If you’re using an MD, CDR, or RI DOCK component, change the Input Display (see page 51).  
With  
(Remote Interactive), you can use the following special functions:  
Auto Power On/Standby  
When you start playback on a component connected via  
on and select that component as the input source. Similarly, when the AV receiver is set to Standby, all components  
connected via will also go on Standby. This function will not work with components that are connected to an AC  
, if the AV receiver is on Standby, it will automatically turn  
OUTLET on the AV receiver.  
Direct Change  
When playback is started on a component connected via  
, the AV receiver automatically selects that component as  
the input source. If your DVD player is connected to the AV receiver’s multichannel input, you’ll need to press the  
tion selects the DVD IN L/R jacks.  
func-  
Remote Control  
You can use the AV receiver’s remote controller to control your other  
-capable Onkyo components. You must enter  
the appropriate remote control code first (see page 109). And remember to point the remote controller at the AV receiver  
and not the other component.  
Notes:  
IN  
• Use only  
are supplied with Onkyo players (DVD, CD, etc.).  
• Some components have two jacks. You can con-  
nect either one to the AV receiver. The other jack is  
for connecting additional -capable components.  
• Connect only Onkyo components to jacks. Con-  
cables for  
connections.  
cables  
L
R
HDMI  
ASSIGNABLE  
RS232  
IN  
4
IN  
3
IN  
2
IN  
1
OUT  
CD  
ANTENNA  
ASSIGNABLE  
AM  
FM
COMPONENT VIDEO  
IN IN IN 1(DVD)  
MONITOR  
3
2
OUT  
Y
MONITOR  
OUT  
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SA  
T
VCR/DVR  
DVD  
IR  
IN  
V
REMOTE  
C
C
B/PB  
ZONE  
OUT  
2
V
S
CONTROL  
DIGITAL ASSIGNABLE  
COAXIAL  
IN  
1
(DVD)  
R/PR  
FRONT  
S
OUT  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
FRONT CENTER  
SURR SURR BACK  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
2
3
1
2
VCR/DVR)  
L
L
L
(CBL/SAT)  
R
R
OPTICAL  
SUBWOOFER  
CENTER  
PHONO  
CD  
TAPE  
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SA  
T
VCR/DVR  
SURR  
DVD  
MULTI CH  
(GAME/TV)  
(CD)  
GND  
SURR BACK  
Bi-AMP  
R
REMOTE  
CONTROL  
ZONE2  
R
FRONT  
R
R
SURR  
R
OUT  
FRONT  
R
(BTL)  
necting other manufacturer’s components may cause  
a malfunction.  
DVD  
• Some components may not support all  
functions.  
e.g., CD player  
Refer to the manuals supplied with your other Onkyo  
components.  
R
L
ANALOG  
AUDIO OUT  
• While Zone 2 or Zone 3 is on, the Auto Power  
e.g., DVD player  
On/Standby and Direct Change  
work.  
functions do not  
R
L
ANALOG  
AUDIO OUT  
Connecting the Power Cord  
• Before connecting the power cord, connect all your speakers and AV components.  
• Connect the power cord to the AV receiver’s AC INLET.  
• Plug the other end of the power cord into a suitable wall outlet.  
• Turning on the AV receiver may cause a momentary power surge that might interfere with other electrical equipment  
on the same circuit. If this is a problem, plug the AV receiver into a different branch circuit.  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Turning On the AV Receiver  
• North American model  
• Other models  
STANDBY  
ON  
STANDBY/ON  
STANDBY/ON  
ON  
STANDBY  
TV  
STANDBY indicator  
STANDBY indicator  
INPUT  
DVD  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
3
+
TV CH  
-
1
GAME/TV  
4
2
AUX1  
5
AUX  
6
2
STANDBY/ON  
STANDBY/ON  
STANDBY  
READY  
TAPE  
7
TUNER  
8
CD  
9
STANDBY  
ZONE  
ZONE  
2
3
ZONE  
2
3
ZONE  
TV VOL  
PHONO  
D. TUN  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
CLEAR  
PURE AUDIO  
AUDIO SEL  
DVD  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SA
0
PURE AUDIO  
AUDIO SEL  
DVD  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/
11  
12  
ZONE  
ZONE  
2
3
OFF  
LEVEL  
TONE  
HDMI OUT  
STEREO  
THX  
INPUT SELECTOR  
ZONE  
ZONE  
2
3
OFF  
LEVEL  
TONE  
HDMI OUT  
STEREO  
THX  
PHONES  
PHONES  
POWER  
MACRO  
ON  
OFF  
ZONE  
ZONE  
3
2
1
2
3
DIGITAL INPUT  
LISTENING MODE  
DIGITAL INPUT  
LISTENING MODE  
REMOTE MODE  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
CDR/MD  
RECEIVER  
CABLE  
DOCK  
RECEIVER  
TAPE/AMP  
SLEEP  
POWER  
Turning On and Standby  
POWER  
Set the [POWER] switch to the ON position ( ).  
(Skip this step if you have the North American model.)  
1
The AV receiver enters Standby mode, and the STANDBY indicator comes on.  
ON  
OFF  
On the AV receiver, press the [STANDBY/ON] button.  
2
Remote  
controller  
AV receiver  
On the remote controller, press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE button,  
followed by the [ON] button.  
The AV receiver comes on, the display lights up, and the STANDBY indicator goes off.  
STANDBY/ON  
RECEIVER  
or  
Pressing the remote controller’s [ON] button again will turn on any components con-  
nected via  
.
ON  
To turn the AV receiver off, press the [STANDBY/ON] button, or press the remote  
controller’s [STANDBY] button. The AV receiver will enter Standby mode. To prevent  
any loud surprises the next time you turn on the AV receiver, turn down the volume  
before you turn it off.  
For non-North American models: To completely shut down the AV receiver, set the [POWER] switch to the OFF  
position ( ).  
To get your system up and running with the minimum of fuss, here’s a few pointers to help you configure the AV  
receiver before you use it for the very first time. These settings only need to be made once.  
Do the automatic speaker setup—this is essential!  
See “Automatic Speaker Setup (Audyssey MultEQ XT)” on page 55.  
Did you connect yourTV to the HDMI OUT or COMPONENT  
If you did, see “HDMI Monitor Setup” on page 46.  
Did you connect a component to an HDMI input,  
Y
HDMI  
component video input, or digital audio input?  
COAXIAL  
PB  
Input Setup” on page 50, or “Digital Input Setup” on page 52 respec-  
PR  
OPTICAL  
tively.  
Did you connect an Onkyo MD recorder, CD recorder, or RI  
OUT  
IN  
Dock?  
If you did, see “Changing the Input Display” on page 51.  
TAPE  
MD recorder, CD recorder,  
RI Dock  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
First Time Setup  
This section explains the settings that you need to make before using the AV receiver for the very first time.  
Speaker Settings  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
3
buttons to select1. Speaker Set-  
tings,and then press [ENTER].  
The Speaker Settings menu appears.  
If you change these settings, you must run the auto-  
ENTER  
matic speaker setup again (see page 55).  
2-1.Speaker Settings  
Speaker Impedance  
Speakers Type  
6ohms  
Normal  
ZONE  
2
1
2
REMOTE MODE  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
CDR/MD  
ENTER  
TV  
CABLE  
SAT  
DOCK  
RECEIVER  
TAPE/AMP  
SLEEP  
1
DIMMER  
2, 3  
1, 6  
2–5  
+
CH  
ENTER  
VOL  
DISC  
ALBUM  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “Speaker  
]
-
4
5
PREV  
CH  
DISPLAY  
MUTING  
Impedance,and use the Left and  
Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to select:  
4 ohms: Select if the impedance of any  
speaker is 4 ohms or more but  
less than 6.  
6 ohms: Select if the impedances of all  
speakers are between 6 and  
16 ohms.  
ENTER  
RANDOM  
If the impedance of any speaker is 4 ohms or more but  
and SURR BACK terminal posts for bi-amping or  
bridging (TX-SR875 only), you must change the  
Speaker Type setting. For hookup information, see “Bi-  
amping the Front Speakers” on page 23, or “Bridging the  
Front Speakers (TX-SR875 only)” on page 24.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to selectSpeakerType,”  
and use the Left and Right  
]
ENTER  
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:  
Notes:  
• When bridging is used, the AV receiver is able to drive  
up to 2.1 speakers in the main room.  
Normal: Select this if you’ve con-  
nected your front speakers  
normally.  
Bi-Amp:Select this if you’ve con-  
nected your front speakers for  
bi-amped operation.  
• When bi-amping is used, the AV receiver is able to  
drive up to 5.1 speakers in the main room.  
• Before you change these settings, turn down the vol-  
ume.  
BTL: (TX-SR875 only) Select this  
if you’ve connected your  
front speakers for bridged  
operation. The BTL indicator  
will appear on the display.  
Press the [RECEIVER] button,  
followed by the [SETUP] button.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
1
RECEIVER  
Press the [SETUP] button.  
Setup closes.  
6
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “2. Speaker  
Setup,and then press [ENTER].  
]
2
Notes:  
ENTER  
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV  
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow  
buttons.  
The Speaker Setup menu appears.  
• The design of the TX-SR805 and TX-SR875 onscreen  
setup menus is slightly different. The TX-SR805  
onscreen setup menus are used throughout this  
instruction manual.  
ENTER  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
First Time Setup—Continued  
HDMI Monitor Setup  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
2
3
buttons to select1. Input/Output  
Assign,and then press  
[ENTER].  
The Input/Output Assign menu  
appears.  
ENTER  
ON  
STANDBY  
TV  
INPUT  
DVD  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
3
+
TV CH  
-
1
GAME/TV  
4
2
AUX1  
5
AUX  
6
2
ENTER  
TAPE  
7
TUNER  
8
CD  
9
TV VOL  
PHONO  
D. TUN  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
CLEAR  
0
11  
12  
INPUT SELECTOR  
MACRO  
ZONE  
ZONE  
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “1. Monitor  
Out,and then press [ENTER].  
]
CDR/MD  
TV  
CABLE  
SAT  
DOCK  
RECEIVER  
TAPE/AMP  
SLEEP  
1
DIMMER  
ENTER  
The Monitor Out menu appears.  
2, 3  
1, 6  
2–5  
+
CH  
1-1.Monitor Out  
ENTER  
VOL  
DISC  
ALBUM  
HDMI Monitor  
Resolution Through  
Yes  
-
PREV  
CH  
DISPLAY  
MUTING  
ENTER  
( )  
*
Note:  
REC  
PLAYLIST  
RANDOM  
• The Resolution Through ( ) setting  
is not available on the TX-SR805.  
*
NG MODE  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to selectHDMI Monitor,”  
and use the Left and Right  
]
4
If you connect your TV to the COMPONENT VIDEO  
OUT, set the HDMI Monitor setting to No so that the  
onscreen setup menus are displayed and composite  
video and S-Video sources are upconverted and output  
by the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT.  
ENTER  
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:  
No: Select this if your TV is con-  
nected to the COMPONENT  
VIDEO MONITOR OUT, S  
MONITOR OUT, or V MON-  
ITOR OUT.  
If you connect your TV to the HDMI OUT, set the HDMI  
Monitor setting to Yes so that the onscreen setup menus  
are displayed and composite video, S-Video, and com-  
ponent video sources are upconverted and output by the  
HDMI OUT.  
ENTER  
Yes: Select this if your TV is con-  
nected to the HDMI OUT.  
On the TX-SR875, you can specify the output resolution  
for the HDMI OUT and COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
and have the AV receiver upconvert the picture resolu-  
tion as necessary to match the resolution supported by  
your TV.  
Note:  
• When Yes is selected, the onscreen  
setup menus are output by only the  
HDMI OUT. If you’re not using the  
HDMI OUT and select Yes by mis-  
take and the menus disappear, press  
the AV receiver’s [HDMI OUT] but-  
ton so that “HDMI Monitor: No”  
appears on the display.  
Press the [RECEIVER] button,  
followed by the [SETUP] button.  
1
RECEIVER  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
If you have the TX-SR805, press  
the [SETUP] button to close  
setup.  
If you have the TX-SR875, con-  
tinue with the next step.  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
First Time Setup—Continued  
Using the HDMI OUT Button  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “Resolution,”  
and use the Left and Right  
]
5
The HDMI Monitor setting can also be set to No or Yes  
by using the [HDMI OUT] button on the AV receiver.  
ENTER  
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:  
Through:Select this to pass video  
through the AV receiver at the  
same resolution and with no  
conversion.  
1, 2  
MASTER VOLUME  
STANDBY/ON  
STANDBY  
READY  
Auto: Select this to have the AV  
receiver automatically con-  
vert video at resolutions not  
supported by your TV.  
ZONE  
ZONE  
2
3
ENTER  
PURE AUDIO  
AUDIO SEL  
DVD  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
GAME/TV  
AUX  
1
AUX  
2
TAPE  
TUNER  
CD  
PHONO  
DISPLAY  
PUSH TO OPEN  
TUNING  
PRESET  
RETURN  
ZONE  
ZONE  
2
3
OFF  
LEVEL  
TONE  
HDMI OUT  
STEREO  
THX  
SETUP MIC  
AUX  
2
L
INPUT  
TUNING  
PHONES  
POWER  
RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE  
SETUP  
CLEAR  
ON  
OFF  
DIGITAL INPUT  
LISTENING MODE  
S
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
R
DIGITAL  
ENTER  
TUNING  
480p: Select this for 480p output  
and video conversion as nec-  
essary. (Not available when  
the HDMI Monitor setting is  
set to No.)  
720p: Select this for 720p output  
and video conversion as nec-  
essary.  
Press the [HDMI OUT] button.  
The current setting is displayed.  
1
HDMI OUT  
1080i: Select this for 1080i output  
and video conversion as nec-  
essary.  
1080p: Select this for 1080p output  
and video conversion as nec-  
essary. (Not available when  
the HDMI Monitor setting is  
set to No.)  
Press the [HDMI OUT] button  
repeatedly to select:  
2
HDMI OUT  
No: Select this if your TV is con-  
nected to the COMPONENT  
VIDEO MONITOR OUT, S  
MONITOR OUT, or V MON-  
ITOR OUT.  
Press the [SETUP] button.  
Setup closes.  
6
Yes: Select this if your TV is con-  
nected to the HDMI OUT.  
Note:  
• When Yes is selected, the onscreen  
setup menus are output by only the  
HDMI OUT. If you’re not using the  
HDMI OUT and select Yes by mis-  
take and the menus disappear, press  
the [HDMI OUT] button to select  
No.  
Notes:  
• See page 29 for charts showing how the HDMI Moni-  
tor and Resolution settings affect the video signal flow  
through the AV receiver.  
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV  
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow  
buttons.  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
First Time Setup—Continued  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
HDMI Input Setup  
2
3
4
buttons to select1. Input/Output  
Assign,and then press  
[ENTER].  
The Input/Output Assign menu  
appears.  
TAPE  
7
8
ENTER  
TV VOL  
PHONO  
D. TUN  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
CLEAR  
0
11  
12  
INPUT SELECTOR  
MACRO  
ZONE  
ZONE  
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
CDR/MD  
ENTER  
TV  
CABLE  
SAT  
DOCK  
RECEIVER  
TAPE/AMP  
SLEEP  
1
DIMMER  
2, 3  
1, 5  
2–4  
+
CH  
ENTER  
VOL  
DISC  
ALBUM  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select2. HDMI Input,”  
and then press [ENTER].  
]
-
PREV  
CH  
DISPLAY  
MUTING  
ENTER  
The HDMI Input menu appears.  
1-2.HDMI Input  
REC  
PLAYLIST  
RANDOM  
DVD  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
GAME/TV  
AUX1  
NING MODE  
ENTER  
AUX2  
If you connect a video component to an HDMI IN, you  
must assign that input to an input selector. For example,  
if you connect your DVD player to HDMI IN 1, you  
must assign HDMI IN 1 to the DVD input selector.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select an input selec-  
tor, and use the Left and Right  
]
By default, none of the HDMI inputs are assigned. The  
following input selectors can be assigned: DVD,  
VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV, AUX 1, AUX 2,  
TAPE, TUNER, CD, PHONO.  
ENTER  
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:  
IN1: Select if the video component  
is connected to HDMI IN 1.  
IN2: Select if the video component  
is connected to HDMI IN 2.  
IN3: Select if the video component  
is connected to HDMI IN 3.  
IN4: Select if the video component  
is connected to HDMI IN 4.  
(TX-SR875 only.)  
If you’ve connected your TV to the AV receiver with an  
HDMI cable, you can set the AV receiver so that com-  
posite video, S-Video, and component video sources are  
upconverted ( ) and output by the HDMI OUT.You can  
ENTER  
*
set this for each input selector by selecting the “- - -”  
option.  
Composite video, S-Video,  
component video  
HDMI  
HDMI  
- - -: Select this to upconvert and  
output composite video,  
IN  
S-Video, and component  
video sources from the HDMI  
OUT.  
( )  
*
OUT  
Composite video, S-Video,  
component video  
Press the [SETUP] button.  
Setup closes.  
5
Press the [RECEIVER] button,  
followed by the [SETUP] button.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
1
RECEIVER  
Notes:  
• Each HDMI IN cannot be assigned to more than one  
input selector.  
• For composite video, S-Video, and component video  
upconversion for the HDMI OUT, the HDMI Monitor  
setting must be set to Yes (see page 46). See page 28  
for more information on video signal flow and upcon-  
version.  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
• When an HDMI IN is assigned to an input selector as  
explained here, the digital audio input for that input  
selector is automatically set to the same HDMI IN.  
See “Digital Input Setup” on page 52.  
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV  
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow  
buttons.  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
First Time Setup—Continued  
Component Video Input Setup  
Press the [RECEIVER] button,  
followed by the [SETUP] button.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
1
2
RECEIVER  
ON  
STANDBY  
TV  
INPUT  
DVD  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
3
+
TV CH  
-
1
GAME/TV  
4
2
AUX1  
5
AUX  
6
2
TAPE  
7
TUNER  
8
CD  
9
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
TV VOL  
PHONO  
D. TUN  
buttons to select1. Input/Output  
Assign,and then press  
[ENTER].  
The Input/Output Assign menu  
appears.  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
CLEAR  
0
11  
12  
INPUT SELECTOR  
MACRO  
ENTER  
ZONE  
ZONE  
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
CDR/MD  
TV  
CABLE  
SAT  
DOCK  
RECEIVER  
TAPE/AMP  
SLEEP  
1
DIMMER  
2, 3  
1, 5  
ENTER  
2–4  
+
CH  
ENTER  
VOL  
DISC  
ALBUM  
-
PREV  
CH  
DISPLAY  
MUTING  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
3
buttons to select “3. Component  
Video Input,and then press  
[ENTER].  
REC  
PLAYLIST  
RANDOM  
ENTER  
NING MODE  
The Component Video Input menu  
appears.  
If you connect a video component to a COMPONENT  
VIDEO IN, you must assign that input to an input  
selector. For example, if you connect your DVD player  
to COMPONENT VIDEO IN 3, you must assign COM-  
PONENT VIDEO IN 3 to the DVD input selector.  
1-3.Component Video Input  
ENTER  
DVD  
IN1  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
GAME/TV  
AUX1  
AUX2  
By default, the DVD input selector is assigned to COM-  
PONENT VIDEO IN 1, and all of the other input selec-  
tors (i.e., VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV, AUX 1,  
AUX 2, TAPE, TUNER, CD, PHONO) are assigned to  
the “- - -” option.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select an input selec-  
tor, and use the Left and Right  
]
4
If you’ve connected your TV to the AV receiver with a  
component video cable, you can set the AV receiver so  
that composite video and S-Video sources are upcon-  
verted ( ) and output by the COMPONENT VIDEO  
OUT.You can set this for each input selector by selecting  
the “- - -” option.  
ENTER  
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:  
IN1: Select if the video component  
is connected to COMPO-  
NENT VIDEO IN 1.  
*
IN2: Select if the video component  
is connected to COMPO-  
NENT VIDEO IN 2.  
Composite video, S-Video  
IN  
Component video  
ENTER  
IN3: Select if the video component  
is connected to COMPO-  
NENT VIDEO IN 3.  
- - -: Select to output composite  
video and S-Video sources  
from the COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT.  
( )  
*
OUT  
Composite video, S-Video  
Component video  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
First Time Setup—Continued  
Changing the Input Display  
Press the [SETUP] button.  
Setup closes.  
5
If you connect an  
-capable Onkyo MiniDisc  
recorder, CD recorder, or RI Dock to the TAPE IN/OUT  
jacks, or connect an RI Dock to the GAME/TV jacks, for  
to work properly, you must change this setting.  
Notes:  
This setting can only be changed on the AV receiver.  
• For composite video and S-Video upconversion for the  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT, the HDMI Monitor set-  
ting must be set to No (see page 46). See page 28 for  
more information on video signal flow and upconver-  
sion.  
1, 2  
1, 2  
MASTER VOLUME  
STANDBY/ON  
STANDBY  
READY  
ZONE  
2
3
ZONE  
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV  
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow  
buttons.  
PURE AUDIO  
AUDIO SEL  
DVD  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
GAME/TV  
AUX  
1
AUX  
2
TAPE  
TUNER  
CD  
PHONO  
DISPLAY  
PUSH TO OPEN  
TUNING  
PRESET  
RETURN  
ZONE  
ZONE  
2
3
OFF  
LEVEL  
TONE  
HDMI OUT  
STEREO  
THX  
SETUP MIC  
AUX  
2
L
INPUT  
TUNING  
PHONES  
POWER  
RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE  
SETUP  
CLEAR  
ON  
OFF  
DIGITAL INPUT  
LISTENING MODE  
S
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
R
DIGITAL  
ENTER  
TUNING  
Press the [TAPE] or [GAME/TV]  
input selector button so that  
“TAPE” or “GAME/TV” appears  
on the display.  
1
TAPE  
or  
GAME/TV  
Press and hold down the [TAPE]  
or [GAME/TV] input selector but-  
ton (about 3 seconds) to change  
the setting.  
2
TAPE  
Repeat this step to select MD, CDR, or  
DOCK.  
or  
For the TAPE input selector, the setting  
changes in this order:  
GAME/TV  
TAPE MD CDR  
DOCK  
For the GAME/TV input selector, the  
setting changes in this order:  
GAME/TV DOCK  
Note:  
• DOCK can be selected for the TAPE input selector or  
GAME/TV input selector, but not both at the same  
time.  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
First Time Setup—Continued  
Digital Input Setup  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
2
3
buttons to select1. Input/Output  
Assign,and then press  
[ENTER].  
The Input/Output Assign menu  
appears.  
ENTER  
ON  
STANDBY  
TV  
INPUT  
DVD  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
3
+
TV CH  
-
1
GAME/TV  
4
2
AUX1  
5
AUX  
6
2
ENTER  
TAPE  
7
TUNER  
8
CD  
9
TV VOL  
PHONO  
D. TUN  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
CLEAR  
0
11  
12  
INPUT SELECTOR  
MACRO  
ZONE  
ZONE  
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “4. Digital  
Input,and then press [ENTER].  
]
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
CDR/MD  
TV  
CABLE  
SAT  
DOCK  
RECEIVER  
TAPE/AMP  
SLEEP  
1
DIMMER  
ENTER  
The Digital Input menu appears.  
2, 3  
1, 5  
2–4  
+
1-4.Digital Input  
CH  
ENTER  
VOL  
DISC  
ALBUM  
DVD  
COAX1  
COAX2  
COAX3  
OPT1  
---  
-
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
GAME/TV  
AUX1  
PREV  
CH  
ENTER  
DISPLAY  
MUTING  
AUX2  
TAPE  
FRONT  
---  
TUNER  
CD  
PHONO  
---  
---  
---  
REC  
PLAYLIST  
RANDOM  
NING MODE  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
4
buttons to select an input selec-  
tor, and then use the Left and  
Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to select:  
COAX1: Select if the component is  
connected to DIGITAL  
If you connect a component to a digital audio input, you  
must assign that input to an input selector. For example,  
if you connect your CD player to OPTICAL IN 2, you  
must assign OPTICAL IN 2 to the CD input selector.  
ENTER  
These are the default assignments.  
COAXIAL IN 1.  
COAX2: Select if the component is  
connected to DIGITAL  
COAXIAL IN 2.  
COAX3: Select if the component is  
connected to DIGITAL  
COAXIAL IN 3.  
OPT1: Select if the component is  
connected to DIGITAL  
OPTICAL IN 1.  
OPT2: Select if the component is  
connected to DIGITAL  
Input selector  
DVD  
Audio input  
COAX1  
COAX2  
COAX3  
OPT1  
ENTER  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
GAME/TV  
AUX 1  
- - -  
AUX 2  
FRONT (Fixed)  
- - -  
TAPE  
TUNER  
CD  
- - -  
OPTICAL IN 2.  
OPT2  
- - -: Select if the component is  
connected to an analog  
PHONO  
- - -  
input.  
Press the [RECEIVER] button,  
followed by the [SETUP] button.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
1
RECEIVER  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
First Time Setup—Continued  
Using the DIGITAL INPUT Button  
Press the [SETUP] button.  
Setup closes.  
5
Digital inputs can also be assigned to input selectors by  
using the [DIGITAL INPUT] button on the AV receiver.  
1
Notes:  
MASTER VOLUME  
selector.  
STANDBY/ON  
STANDBY  
READY  
ZONE  
ZONE  
2
3
• The TUNER input selector cannot be assigned and is  
fixed at the “- - -” option.  
PURE AUDIO  
AUDIO SEL  
DVD  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
GAME/TV  
AUX  
1
AUX  
2
TAPE  
TUNER  
CD  
PHONO  
DISPLAY  
PUSH TO OPEN  
TUNING  
PRESET  
RETURN  
ZONE  
ZONE  
2
3
OFF  
LEVEL  
TONE  
HDMI OUT  
STEREO  
THX  
SETUP MIC  
AUX  
2
L
INPUT  
TUNING  
PHONES  
POWER  
RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE  
SETUP  
• When an HDMI IN is assigned to an input selector in  
“HDMI Video Setup” on page 48, this input assign-  
ment is automatically set to the same HDMI IN. And  
in addition to the usual inputs (e.g., COAX1, COAX2,  
etc.), you can also select HDMI inputs.  
CLEAR  
ON  
OFF  
R
DIGITAL  
DIGITAL INPUT  
LISTENING MODE  
S
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
ENTER  
TUNING  
2, 3  
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV  
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow  
buttons.  
Press the input selector button  
for the input selector that you  
want to assign.  
VCR/DVR CBL/SAT  
1
DVD  
GAME/TV  
TAPE  
AUX 1  
AUX 2  
CD  
TUNER  
PHONO  
Press the [DIGITAL INPUT]  
button.  
2
The current assignment is displayed.  
DIGITAL INPUT  
Press the [DIGITAL INPUT] but-  
ton repeatedly to select an  
option.  
3
Available options are the same as for  
the Digital Input menu. See step 4 on  
page 52.  
DIGITAL INPUT  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
First Time Setup—Continued  
Analog Input Setup  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “5. Analog  
]
3
Input,and then press [ENTER].  
ENTER  
The Analog Input menu appears.  
ON  
STANDBY  
TV  
1-5.Analog Input  
INPUT  
Multich  
DVD  
DVD  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
3
+
TV CH  
-
1
GAME/TV  
4
2
AUX1  
5
AUX  
6
2
ENTER  
TAPE  
7
TUNER  
8
CD  
9
TV VOL  
PHONO  
D. TUN  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
CLEAR  
0
11  
12  
INPUT SELECTOR  
MACRO  
ZONE  
ZONE  
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Use the Left and Right [ ]/[  
buttons to select an input selec-  
tor.  
You can assign the multichannel input  
to the following input selectors: DVD,  
VCR/DVR, CBL/SAT, GAME/TV,  
AUX 1, AUX 2, TAPE, CD, or  
PHONO.  
]
4
5
CDR/MD  
TV  
CABLE  
SAT  
DOCK  
RECEIVER  
TAPE/AMP  
SLEEP  
1
DIMMER  
ENTER  
2, 3  
1, 5  
2–4  
+
CH  
ENTER  
VOL  
DISC  
ALBUM  
-
PREV  
CH  
DISPLAY  
MUTING  
Press the [SETUP] button.  
Setup closes.  
REC  
PLAYLIST  
RANDOM  
NING MODE  
If you connect a component to the AV receiver’s analog  
multichannel input, you must assign that input to an  
input selector. For example, if you connect your DVD  
player to the MULTI CH input, you must assign it to the  
DVD input selector.  
Notes:  
channel input, press the [AUDIO SEL] button repeat-  
edly to select Multich (see page 70).  
• Once assigned to an input selector, use the [AUDIO  
SEL] button to select the multichannel input (see  
page 70).  
Press the [RECEIVER] button,  
followed by the [SETUP] button.  
1
RECEIVER  
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV  
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow  
buttons.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
2
buttons to select1. Input/Output  
Assign,and then press  
[ENTER].  
ENTER  
The Input/Output Assign menu  
appears.  
ENTER  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
First Time Setup—Continued  
Using Audyssey MultEQ XT  
Automatic Speaker Setup  
(Audyssey MultEQ XT)  
Notes:  
With the supplied speaker setup microphone, Audyssey  
MultEQ XT can measure the number of speakers con-  
nected, their sizes, crossover frequencies, and distances  
from the listening position and calculate the optimal  
speaker settings for you automatically.  
• If any of your speakers is 4 ohms, change the  
Speaker Impedance setting before running the  
automatic speaker setup (see page 45).  
• If the AV receiver is muted, it will be unmuted  
automatically when the automatic speaker setup  
starts.  
Before using this function, connect and position all of  
your speakers.  
• Automatic speaker setup cannot be performed  
while a pair of headphones is connected.  
Measurement Positions  
• It takes about 15 minutes to complete the auto-  
matic speaker setup for three positions. Total mea-  
surement time varies depending on the number of  
positions and speakers.  
To create a listening environment in which several  
people can enjoy your home theater simultaneously,  
Audyssey MultEQ XT takes measurements at up to eight  
positions within the listening area.  
• Do not disconnect the speaker setup microphone  
during the automatic speaker setup, unless you  
want to cancel the setup.  
1st measurement position  
This is the center position of your listening area, or  
the listening position if there’s only one listener.  
• Do not connect or disconnect any speakers during  
the automatic speaker setup.  
2nd–8th measurement positions  
These are the other listening positions (i.e., the  
places where the other listeners will sit). You can  
measure up to eight positions.  
1
The following examples show some typical home theater  
seating arrangements. Choose the one that best matches  
yours, and position the microphone accordingly when  
prompted.  
MASTER VOLUME  
STANDBY/ON  
STANDBY  
READY  
ZONE  
ZONE  
2
3
TV  
TV  
TV  
TV  
TV  
TV  
TV  
TV  
TV  
PURE AUDIO  
AUDIO SEL  
DVD  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
GAME/TV  
AUX  
1
AUX  
2
TAPE  
TUNER  
CD  
PHONO  
DISPLAY  
PUSH TO OPEN  
TUNING  
PRESET  
RETURN  
ZONE  
ZONE  
2
3
OFF  
LEVEL  
TONE  
HDMI OUT  
STEREO  
THX  
SETUP MIC  
AUX  
2
L
INPUT  
TUNING  
PHONES  
POWER  
RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE  
SETUP  
CLEAR  
ON  
OFF  
DIGITAL INPUT  
LISTENING MODE  
S
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
R
DIGITAL  
ENTER  
TUNING  
SETUP MIC  
2, 9  
ZONE  
2
1
REMOTE
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
CDR/MD  
TV  
CABLE  
SAT  
DOCK  
RECEIVER  
TAPE/AMP  
SLEEP  
DIMMER  
ENTER  
,
+
CH  
ENTER  
VOL  
DISC  
ALBUM  
-
PREV  
CH  
DISPLAY  
MUTING  
:
:
Listening area  
Listening position  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
First Time Setup—Continued  
Turn on the AV receiver and the  
connected TV.  
On the TV, select the input to which the  
AV receiver is connected.  
The speaker detect results  
appear.  
1
2
4
AUDYSSEY  
Auto Speaker Setup  
ENTER  
-----SP Detect Result-----  
FL : Yes  
FR : Yes  
SR : Yes  
SBR : Yes  
SW : Yes  
SL : Yes  
SBL : Yes  
C : No  
Place the setup microphone at  
the 1st measurement position,  
and connect it to the SETUP MIC  
jack.  
SETUP MIC  
Next  
Retry  
Cancel  
ENTER  
AUDYSSEY  
Auto Speaker Setup  
Yes” means that the speaker was  
detected. “No” means that no speaker  
was detected.  
Please place microphone at center  
of listening area at ear height.  
If you agree with the results, use  
the Up and Down [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select Next, and then  
press [ENTER].  
Push Enter : Next  
Notes:  
The options are:  
• Make sure the microphone is hori-  
zontal.  
Next: Proceed to the next step.  
Retry: Return to step 2 and try again.  
Cancel: Cancel the automatic speaker  
setup.  
• If there’s an obstacle between the  
microphone and any speaker, the  
automatic setup will not work cor-  
rectly. Set up the room as you would  
when enjoying a DVD movie.  
The following screen appears.  
5
• Positioning the microphone close to  
where your ears would normally be  
will provide the best results.You can  
set the height of the microphone by  
using a tripod or level table.  
AUDYSSEY  
Auto Speaker Setup  
Please place microphone at  
2nd Position at ear height.  
Push Enter : Next  
Press [ENTER].  
3
AUDYSSEY  
Auto Speaker Setup  
Place the setup microphone at  
the next position (see page 55),  
and then press [ENTER].  
Audyssey MultEQ XT performs more  
measurements. This takes a few min-  
utes.  
Do not unplug microphone.  
Please keep quiet.  
Now Measuring...  
AUDYSSEY  
Auto Speaker Setup  
A test tone is output by each speaker in  
turn, as Audyssey MultEQ XT deter-  
mines which speakers are connected.  
This takes a few minutes.  
Do not unplug microphone.  
Please keep quiet.  
Now Measuring...  
Note:  
• If any extraneous noise is picked up  
by the microphone, the automatic  
setup may not work correctly, so  
keep quiet.  
When prompted, place the setup  
microphone at the next position,  
and repeat step 5.  
6
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
First Time Setup—Continued  
After the 6th or 7th measurement, the  
following screen appears.  
Review SP Distance: Review the  
speaker distance settings (see  
“Reviewing the Results” on  
page 59).  
7
AUDYSSEY  
Auto Speaker Setup  
ENTER  
Please select “Next”, when measuring  
next position, and select “finish”,  
when ending.  
Review SP Level: Review the speaker  
levelsettings(seeReviewing  
the Results” on page 59).  
Cancel: Cancel the automatic speaker  
setup.  
Next  
finish(Calculate)  
ENTER  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select an option, and  
then press [ENTER].  
Next: Select this if you want to mea-  
sure another listening posi-  
tion. After the 8th  
]
If you selected “Save,” the results are  
saved, and the following screen  
appears.  
10  
AUDYSSEY  
Auto Speaker Setup  
measurement has been taken,  
the procedure automatically  
proceeds to step 8.  
Saving...  
Finish(Calculate):Select this if you  
don’t want to measure any  
more listening positions and  
are ready to calculate the  
Disconnect the setup micro-  
phone.  
11  
results, then go to step 8.  
AUDYSSEY  
Auto Speaker Setup  
When the measurements are  
complete, the following screen  
appears.  
8
9
Please unplug microphone.  
AUDYSSEY  
Auto Speaker Setup  
Calculating...  
Notes:  
• When the automatic speaker setup is complete, the  
Equalizer Settings (page 91) will be set to Audyssey.  
You can cancel the automatic speaker setup at any  
point in the procedure simply by disconnecting the  
setup microphone.  
When the calculations are com-  
plete, the following screen  
appears.  
ENTER  
AUDYSSEY  
Auto Speaker Setup  
Error Messages  
Save  
Review SP Config  
Review SP Distance  
Review SP Level  
Cancel  
During the automatic speaker setup, one of the following  
error messages may appear:  
ENTER  
Ambient noise is too high  
AUDYSSEY  
Auto Speaker Setup  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
buttons to select an option, and  
then press [ENTER].  
Save: Save the calculated settings  
and exit the automatic  
Ambient noise is too high.  
Retry  
Cancel  
speaker setup.  
Review SP Config: Review the  
speakerconfigurationsettings  
(see “Reviewing the Results”  
on page 59).  
This message appears if there’s too much background  
noise and the measurements cannot be performed prop-  
erly. Remove the source of the noise and try again, or  
cancel the automatic speaker setup.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
First Time Setup—Continued  
Speaker Detect Error  
AUDYSSEY  
Auto Speaker Setup  
-----Speaker Detect Error-----  
AUDYSSEY  
Auto Speaker Setup  
-----Speaker Detect Error-----  
FL : Error  
SL : Yes  
SBL : Yes  
C : Yes  
FR : Yes  
SR : Yes  
SBR : Yes  
SW : Yes  
FL : Yes  
SL : Yes  
SBL : Yes  
C : No  
FR : Yes  
SR : Yes  
SBR : Yes  
SW : Yes  
Retry  
Cancel  
Retry  
Cancel  
There is a problem with a speaker. The speaker may be  
broken or the subwoofer may be emitting sound that is  
too high.  
This message appears if a speaker is not detected. “Yes”  
means that a speaker was detected. “No” means that no  
speaker was detected. Check your speaker connections  
and retry, or cancel the automatic speaker setup.  
AUDYSSEY  
Auto Speaker Setup  
AUDYSSEY  
Auto Speaker Setup  
-----Speaker Detect Error-----  
Speaker Detect Error  
FL : Yes  
SL : ---  
SBL : ---  
C : Yes  
FR : No  
SR : ---  
SBR : ---  
SW : ---  
Retry  
Cancel  
Retry  
Cancel  
A different number of speakers has been detected.  
Writing Error  
One of the front speakers has not been detected.  
AUDYSSEY  
Auto Speaker Setup  
AUDYSSEY  
Auto Speaker Setup  
-----Speaker Detect Error-----  
FL : Yes  
SL : ---  
SBL : ---  
C : Yes  
FR : Yes  
SR : No  
SBR : ---  
SW : ---  
Writing Error!  
Retry  
Cancel  
Retry  
Cancel  
This message appears if saving fails. Try saving again, or  
cancel the automatic speaker setup.  
One of the surround speakers has not been detected.  
If this message appears repeatedly, the AV receiver may  
be malfunctioning and you should contact your Onkyo  
dealer.  
AUDYSSEY  
Auto Speaker Setup  
-----Speaker Detect Error-----  
FL : Yes  
SL : ---  
SBL : ---  
C : Yes  
FR : Yes  
SR : No  
SBR : Yes  
SW : ---  
Retry  
Cancel  
The surround back speakers have been detected but the  
surround speakers haven’t.  
AUDYSSEY  
Auto Speaker Setup  
-----Speaker Detect Error-----  
FL : Yes  
SL : ---  
SBL : No  
C : Yes  
FR : Yes  
SR : Yes  
SBR : Yes  
SW : ---  
Retry  
Cancel  
The right surround back speaker has been detected but  
the left surround back speaker hasn’t.  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
First Time Setup—Continued  
Changing the Speaker Settings Manually  
Reviewing the Results  
In some cases, the measurements taken by the automatic  
speaker setup may not provide usable results. If running  
the speaker setup a second time doesn’t help, you’ll have  
to set the speaker settings manually (see pages 86–91).  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
buttons to select the settings that  
you want to review, and then  
press [ENTER].  
ENTER  
Notes:  
AUDYSSEY  
Auto Speaker Setup  
• For THX-certified speakers, the 80 Hz (THX) cross-  
over frequency is recommended. If you use the auto-  
matic speaker setup, you’ll need to manually select  
80 Hz (THX) for each THX-certified speaker (see  
page 86).  
Save  
Review SP Config  
Review SP Distance  
Review SP Level  
Cancel  
ENTER  
• Because of the complexities of low-frequency sounds  
and the way they interact with a room, THX recom-  
mends setting the subwoofer level and distance manu-  
ally.  
The options are:  
Review SP Config  
Review the speaker configuration  
settings.  
Using a Powered Subwoofer  
If you’re using a powered subwoofer, as it outputs very  
low-frequency sound and its position is usually low  
down, it may not be detected by the automatic speaker  
setup. In this case, increase the subwoofer’s volume,  
select its highest crossover frequency, and then try run-  
ning the automatic speaker setup again. Note that if the  
volume is set too high and the sound distorts, it may not  
be detected, so use an appropriate volume level. If the  
subwoofer has a low-pass filter switch, set it to Off or  
Direct. Refer to your subwoofer’s instruction manual for  
details.  
AUDYSSEY  
Auto Speaker Setup  
Review SP Config  
Subwoofer  
Front  
:
:
:
:
:
:
Yes  
Full Band  
80Hz  
Center  
Surround  
Surr Back  
Surr Back Ch  
100Hz  
150Hz  
2ch  
Review SP Distance  
Review the speaker distance set-  
tings.  
AUDYSSEY  
Auto Speaker Setup  
Review SP Distance  
Left  
Center  
Right  
Surr Right  
Surr Back R  
Surr Back L  
Surr Left  
Subwoofer  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
15ft  
15ft  
15ft  
7ft  
7ft  
7ft  
7ft  
15ft  
Review SP Level  
Review the speaker level settings.  
AUDYSSEY  
Auto Speaker Setup  
Review SP Level  
Left  
Center  
Right  
Surr Right  
Surr Back R  
Surr Back L  
Surr Left  
Subwoofer  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
+12dB  
0dB  
–12dB  
+3dB  
+4dB  
-6dB  
-3dB  
0dB  
Press [RETURN] to return to the pre-  
vious screen.  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
First Time Setup—Continued  
TV Format Setup  
(not North American models)  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “2. OSD Setup,”  
and then press [ENTER].  
]
3
ENTER  
The OSD Setup menu appears.  
6-2.OSD Setup  
ON  
STANDBY  
Immidiate Display  
Monitor Type  
Display Position  
TV Format  
On  
4:3  
Bottom  
Auto  
TV  
INPUT  
DVD  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
3
+
TV CH  
-
1
GAME/TV  
4
2
AUX1  
5
ENTER  
AUX  
6
2
Language  
TAPE  
7
TUNER  
8
CD  
9
( )  
*
TV VOL  
PHONO  
D. TUN  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
INPUT SELECTOR  
MACRO  
CLEAR  
0
11  
12  
Note:  
• The Language ( ) setting is not  
available on the TX-SR805.  
ZONE  
ZONE  
3
2
1
2
3
*
REMOTE MODE  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
CDR/MD  
TV  
CABLE  
SAT  
DOCK  
RECEIVER  
TAPE/AMP  
SLEEP  
1
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “TV Format,”  
and then use the Left and Right  
]
4
DIMMER  
2, 3  
1, 5  
2–4  
+
ENTER  
CH  
ENTER  
VOL  
DISC  
ALBUM  
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:  
Auto: Select this to have the AV  
receiver automatically detect  
the TV system from the video  
input signals.  
-
PREV  
CH  
DISPLAY  
MUTING  
REC  
PLAYLIST  
RANDOM  
NTSC: Select if the TV system in  
your area is NTSC.  
ENTER  
NING MODE  
PAL: Select if the TV system in  
your area is PAL.  
For the onscreen setup menus to display properly, you  
must specify the TV system used in your area.  
Press the [SETUP] button.  
Setup closes.  
5
Press the [RECEIVER] button,  
1
followed by the [SETUP] button.  
RECEIVER  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
Note:  
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV  
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow  
buttons.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “6. Miscella-  
]
2
neous,and then press [ENTER].  
ENTER  
The Miscellaneous menu appears.  
ENTER  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
First Time Setup—Continued  
AM Frequency Step Setup  
(on some models)  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “3.Tuner,” and  
then press [ENTER].  
]
3
4
ENTER  
The Tuner menu appears.  
7-3.Tuner  
ON  
STANDBY  
AM Freq Step  
9kHz  
TV  
INPUT  
DVD  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
3
+
TV CH  
-
1
GAME/TV  
4
2
AUX1  
5
ENTER  
AUX  
6
2
TAPE  
7
TUNER  
8
CD  
9
TV VOL  
PHONO  
D. TUN  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
CLEAR  
0
11  
12  
INPUT SELECTOR  
MACRO  
ZONE  
ZONE  
3
2
1
2
3
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “AM Freq.  
]
REMOTE MODE  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
CDR/MD  
Step,and then use the Left and  
Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to select:  
10 kHz: Select if 10 kHz steps are  
used in your area.  
9 kHz: Select if 9 kHz steps are used  
in your area.  
TV  
CABLE  
SAT  
DOCK  
RECEIVER  
TAPE/AMP  
SLEEP  
ENTER  
1
DIMMER  
2, 3  
1, 5  
2–4  
+
CH  
ENTER  
VOL  
DISC  
ALBUM  
-
PREV  
CH  
DISPLAY  
MUTING  
ENTER  
REC  
PLAYLIST  
RANDOM  
NING MODE  
Press the [SETUP] button.  
Setup closes.  
5
For AM tuning to work properly, you must specify the  
AM frequency step used in your area. Note that when  
this setting is changed, all radio presets are deleted.  
Press the [RECEIVER] button,  
followed by the [SETUP] button.  
1
Note:  
RECEIVER  
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV  
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow  
buttons.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
2
buttons to select “7. Hardware  
Setup,and then press [ENTER].  
The Hardware Setup menu appears.  
ENTER  
ENTER  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
PlayingYour AV Components  
Basic AV Receiver Operation  
ON  
STANDBY  
TV  
INPUT  
DVD  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
3
+
TV CH  
-
1
GAME/TV  
4
2
AUX1  
5
3
AUX  
6
2
MASTER VOLUME  
TAPE  
7
TUNER  
8
CD  
9
1
STANDBY/ON  
TV VOL  
PHONO  
D. TUN  
STANDBY  
READY  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
INPUT SELECTOR  
MACRO  
CLEAR  
0
11  
12  
ZONE  
ZONE  
2
3
ZONE  
ZONE  
3
2
1
2
3
PURE AUDIO  
AUDIO SEL  
DVD  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
GAME/TV  
AUX  
1
AUX  
2
TAPE  
TUNER  
CD  
PHONO  
DISPLAY  
PUSH TO OPEN  
REMOTE MODE  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
CDR/MD  
TV  
CABLE  
SAT  
DOCK  
RECEIVER  
TAPE/AMP  
SLEEP  
1
3
DIMMER  
1
+
CH  
ENTER  
VOL  
DISC  
ALBUM  
-
PR
Use the AV receiver’s input selector buttons to select an input source.  
1
AV receiver  
Remote  
To select an input source with the remote controller, press its  
[RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE button, and then use its INPUT SELECTOR  
buttons.  
controller  
RECEIVER  
DVD  
VCR/DVR CBL/SAT  
GAME/TV  
TAPE  
AUX 1  
AUX 2  
CD  
DVD  
1
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
3
TUNER  
2
AUX1  
5
GAME/TV  
4
AUX  
6
2
PHONO  
TAPE  
7
TUNER  
8
CD  
9
PHONO  
+10  
Start playback on the source component.  
To watch a DVD or other video source, on your TV, select the video input that’s con-  
nected to the AV receiver’s COMPONENT VIDEO OUT, HDMI OUT, or MONITOR  
OUT.  
On some DVD players, you may need to change the digital or HDMI audio output  
settings.  
2
3
To adjust the volume, use the MASTER VOLUME control or the remote  
controller’s [VOL] button.  
Since the AV receiver is designed for home theaters, it has a wide volume range for  
precise adjustment. The volume can be set to –dB, –81.5 dB, –81.0 dB through  
+18.0 dB.  
Remote  
controller  
AV receiver  
MASTER VOLUME  
VOL  
Select a listening mode and enjoy!  
See “Using the Listening Modes” on page 71.  
4
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Listening to the Radio  
Manual Tuning Mode  
Listening to AM/FM Stations  
Press the [TUNING MODE] button  
so that the AUTO indicator disap-  
pears from the display.  
TUNING  
MODE  
1
TUNING MODE  
TUNING  
MASTER VOLUME  
STANDBY/ON  
STANDBY  
READY  
Press and hold theTUNING Up or  
Down [ ]/[ ] button.  
2
ZONE  
ZONE  
2
3
TUNING  
PURE AUDIO  
AUDIO SEL  
DVD  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
GAME/TV  
AUX  
1
AUX  
2
TAPE  
TUNER  
CD  
PHONO  
DISPLAY  
PUSH TO OPEN  
The frequency stops changing when  
you release the button.  
TUNING  
PRESET  
RETURN  
ZONE  
ZONE  
2
3
OFF  
LEVEL  
TONE  
HDMI OUT  
STEREO  
THX  
SETUP MIC  
AUX  
2
L
INPUT  
TUNING  
PHONES  
POWER  
RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE  
SETUP  
CLEAR  
ON  
OFF  
DIGITAL INPUT  
LISTENING MODE  
S
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
R
DIGITAL  
ENTER  
TUNING  
TUNING  
Press the button repeatedly to change  
the frequency one step at a time.  
TUNER  
With the built-in tuner, you can enjoy AM and FM radio  
stations and store your favorite stations as presets for  
easy selection.  
The North American model changes FM frequency in  
0.2 MHz steps, 10 kHz steps for AM. For other models  
it’s 0.05 MHz steps for FM and 9 kHz steps for AM.  
In Manual Tuning mode, FM stations will be in mono.  
Use the [TUNER] input selector  
button to select AM or FM.  
Tuning into Weak FM Stereo Stations  
In this example, FM has been selected.  
TUNER  
If the signal from a stereo FM station is weak, it may be  
impossible to get good reception. In this case, switch to  
Manual Tuning mode and listen to the station in mono.  
Band  
Frequency  
(Actual display depends on country.)  
Tuning into AM/FM Radio Stations  
Auto Tuning Mode  
Press the [TUNING MODE] button  
so that the AUTO indicator  
TUNING  
MODE  
1
appears on the display.  
Press the TUNING Up or Down  
2
[
]/[ ] button.  
TUNING  
Searching stops when a station is  
found.  
TUNING  
When tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator  
appears. When tuned into a stereo FM station, the FM  
STEREO indicator also appears.  
TUNED  
AUTO  
FM STEREO  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Listening to the Radio—Continued  
Tuning into Stations by Frequency  
You can tune into AM and FM stations directly by enter-  
ing the appropriate frequency.  
Displaying AM/FM Radio Information  
DISPLAY  
MASTER VOLUME  
STANDBY/ON  
STANDBY  
READY  
ON  
STANDBY  
ZONE  
2
3
TV  
ZONE  
INPUT  
DVD  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
3
PURE AUDIO  
AUDIO SEL  
DVD  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
GAME/TV  
AUX  
1
AUX  
2
TAPE  
TUNER  
CD  
PHONO  
DISPLAY  
PUSH TO OPEN  
Number  
buttons  
+
TV CH  
-
1
GAME/TV  
4
2
AUX1  
5
AUX  
6
2
TAPE  
7
TUNER  
8
CD  
9
TV VOL  
PHONO  
D. TUN  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
INPUT SELECTOR  
MACRO  
CLEAR  
12  
0
D.TUN  
11  
ZONE  
ZONE  
3
2
1
2
3
Press the [DISPLAY] button to  
display the available information.  
REMOTE MODE  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
CDR/MD  
TV  
CABLE  
SAT  
DOCK  
RECEIVER  
TAPE/AMP  
SLEEP  
RECEIVER  
DISPLAY  
Band  
Frequency  
Preset #  
Press the [RECEIVER] button,  
followed by the [D.TUN] button.  
The [RECEIVER] button flashes.  
1
2
RECEIVER  
Listening mode  
D. TUN  
CLEAR  
Note:  
(Actual display depends on country.)  
• When you select a preset with a custom name (see  
page 94), its name is displayed instead of the band and  
frequency.  
Within 8 seconds, use the num-  
ber buttons to enter the fre-  
quency of the radio station.  
For example, to tune to 87.5 (FM),  
press 8, 7, 5.  
DVD  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
1
GAME/TV  
4
2
AUX1  
5
3
AUX  
6
2
TAPE  
7
TUNER  
8
CD  
9
PHONO  
+10  
0
Note:  
While the [RECEIVER] button is flash-  
ing, you cannot select another input  
source with the remote controller.  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Listening to the Radio—Continued  
Using RDS (not North American  
model)  
RDS only works in areas where RDS broadcasts are  
available. When tuned to an RDS station, the RDS indi-  
cator appears.  
RDS Program Types (PTY)  
Type  
Display  
None  
NONE  
RDS indicator  
News reports  
Current affairs  
Information  
Sport  
NEWS  
AFFAIRS  
INFO  
SPORT  
Education  
EDUCATE  
DRAMA  
Drama  
What is RDS?  
RDS stands for Radio Data System and is a method of  
transmitting data in FM radio signals. It was developed  
by the European Broadcasting Union (EBU) and is avail-  
able in most European countries. Many FM stations use  
it these days. In addition to displaying text information,  
RDS can also help you find radio stations by type (e.g.,  
news, sport, rock, etc.).  
Culture  
CULTURE  
SCIENCE  
VARIED  
Science and technology  
Varied  
Pop music  
Rock music  
Middle of the road music  
Light classics  
Serious classics  
Other music  
Weather  
POP M  
ROCK M  
EASY M  
LIGHT M  
CLASSICS  
OTHER M  
WEATHER  
FINANCE  
CHILDREN  
SOCIAL  
RELIGION  
PHONE IN  
TRAVEL  
LEISURE  
JAZZ  
The AV receiver supports four types of RDS informa-  
tion:  
PS (Program Service)  
When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting PS  
information, the station’s name will be displayed. Press-  
ing the [DISPLAY] button will display the frequency for  
3 seconds.  
Finance  
Children’s programmes  
Social affairs  
Religion  
RT (Radio Text)  
When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting text  
information, the text will be shown on the display (see  
page 66).  
Phone in  
Travel  
Leisure  
PTY (Program Type)  
This allows you to search RDS radio stations by type  
(see page 66).  
Jazz music  
Country music  
National music  
Oldies music  
Folk music  
Documentary  
Alarm test  
COUNTRY  
NATION M  
OLDIES  
FOLK M  
DOCUMENT  
TEST  
TP (Traffic Program)  
This allows you to search for RDS radio stations that  
broadcast traffic information (see page 66).  
Notes:  
• In some cases, the characters displayed on the AV  
receiver may not be identical to those broadcast by the  
radio station. Also, unexpected characters may be dis-  
played when unsupported characters are received.  
This is not a malfunction.  
Alarm  
ALARM  
• If the signal from an RDS station is weak, RDS data  
may be displayed intermittently or not at all.  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Listening to the Radio—Continued  
Displaying Radio Text (RT)  
To start the search, press  
[ENTER].  
The AV receiver searches until it finds a  
station of the type you specified, at  
which point it stops briefly before con-  
tinuing with the search.  
4
5
RT/PTY/TP  
MASTER VOLUME  
ENTER  
STANDBY/ON  
STANDBY  
READY  
ZONE  
ZONE  
2
3
PURE AUDIO  
AUDIO SEL  
DVD  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
GAME/TV  
AUX  
1
AUX  
2
TAPE  
TUNER  
CD  
PHONO  
DISPLAY  
PUSH TO OPEN  
TUNING  
PRESET  
RETURN  
ZONE  
ZONE  
2
3
OFF  
LEVEL  
TONE  
HDMI OUT  
STEREO  
THX  
SETUP MIC  
AUX  
2
L
INPUT  
TUNING  
When a station you want to listen  
to is found, press [ENTER].  
If no stations are found, the message  
“Not Found” appears.  
PHONES  
POWER  
RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE  
SETUP  
CLEAR  
ON  
OFF  
DIGITAL INPUT  
LISTENING MODE  
S
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
R
DIGITAL  
ENTER  
TUNING  
ENTER  
When tuned to an RDS station that’s broadcasting text  
information, the text can be displayed.  
Press the [RT/PTY/TP] button  
once.  
Listening to Traffic News (TP)  
RT/PTY/TP  
The RT information scrolls across the  
display.  
2
1
MASTER VOLUME  
STANDBY/ON  
STANDBY  
READY  
Notes:  
ZONE  
2
3
ZONE  
• The message “Waiting” may appear while the AV  
receiver waits for the RT information.  
PURE AUDIO  
AUDIO SEL  
DVD  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
GAME/TV  
AUX  
1
AUX  
2
TAPE  
TUNER  
CD  
PHONO  
DISPLAY  
PUSH TO OPEN  
TUNING  
PRESET  
RETURN  
ZONE  
ZONE  
2
3
OFF  
LEVEL  
TONE  
HDMI OUT  
STEREO  
THX  
SETUP MIC  
AUX  
2
L
INPUT  
TUNING  
PHONES  
POWER  
RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE  
SETUP  
CLEAR  
• If the message “No Text Data” appears on the display,  
no RT information is available.  
ON  
OFF  
DIGITAL INPUT  
LISTENING MODE  
S
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
R
DIGITAL  
ENTER  
TUNING  
3
Finding Stations by Type (PTY)  
You can search for stations that broadcast traffic news.  
2
3 1  
4, 5  
Use the [TUNER] input selector  
button to select FM.  
1
MASTER VOLUME  
STANDBY/ON  
STANDBY  
READY  
ZONE  
2
3
TUNER  
ZONE  
PURE AUDIO  
AUDIO SEL  
DVD  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
GAME/TV  
AUX  
1
AUX  
2
TAPE  
TUNER  
CD  
PHONO  
DISPLAY  
PUSH TO OPEN  
TUNING  
PRESET  
RETURN  
ZONE  
ZONE  
2
3
OFF  
LEVEL  
TONE  
HDMI OUT  
STEREO  
THX  
SETUP MIC  
AUX  
2
L
INPUT  
TUNING  
PHONES  
POWER  
RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE  
SETUP  
Press the [RT/PTY/TP] button  
three times.  
2
CLEAR  
ON  
OFF  
DIGITAL INPUT  
LISTENING MODE  
S
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
R
DIGITAL  
ENTER  
TUNING  
RT/PTY/TP  
If the current radio station is broadcast-  
ing TP (Traffic Program), “[TP]” will  
appear on the display and traffic news  
will be heard as and when it’s broad-  
cast. If “TP” without square brackets  
appears, this means that the station is  
not broadcasting TP.  
You can search for radio stations by type.  
Use the [TUNER] input selector  
button to select FM.  
1
TUNER  
To locate a station that is broad-  
casting TP, press [ENTER].  
The AV receiver searches until it finds a  
station that’s broadcasting TP.  
If no stations are found, the message  
“Not Found” appears.  
3
Press the [RT/PTY/TP] button  
twice.  
The current program type appears on  
the display.  
2
RT/PTY/TP  
ENTER  
Use the PRESET [ ]/[ ] buttons  
to select the type of program you  
want.  
3
PRESET  
See the table on page 65.  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Listening to the Radio—Continued  
Selecting Presets  
Presetting AM/FM Stations  
PRESET  
2, 4  
3
MASTER VOLUME  
STANDBY/ON  
MASTER VOLUME  
STANDBY  
READY  
ZONE  
2
3
STANDBY/ON  
ZONE  
STANDBY  
READY  
PURE AUDIO  
AUDIO SEL  
DVD  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
GAME/TV  
AUX  
1
AUX  
2
TAPE  
TUNER  
CD  
PHONO  
DISPLAY  
PUSH TO OPEN  
ZONE  
2
3
ZONE  
TUNING  
RETURN  
ZONE  
ZONE  
2
3
OFF  
LEVEL  
TONE  
HDMI OUT  
STEREO  
THX  
SETUP MIC  
AUX  
2
L
INPUT  
TUNING  
PHONES  
POWER  
RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE  
SETUP  
PRESET  
PURE AUDIO  
AUDIO SEL  
DVD  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
GAME/TV  
AUX  
1
AUX  
2
TAPE  
TUNER  
CD  
PHONO  
DISPLAY  
CLEAR  
ON  
OFF  
PUSH TO OPEN  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
R
DIGITAL INPUT  
LISTENING MODE  
S
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
ENTER  
TUNING  
TUNING  
PRESET  
RETURN  
ZONE  
ZONE  
2
3
OFF  
LEVEL  
TONE  
HDMI OUT  
STEREO  
THX  
SETUP MIC  
AUX  
2
L
INPUT  
TUNING  
PHONES  
POWER  
RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE  
SETUP  
CLEAR  
ON  
OFF  
DIGITAL INPUT  
LISTENING MODE  
S
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
R
DIGITAL  
ENTER  
TUNING  
TV  
CABLE  
SAT  
SLEEP  
DIMMER  
You can store a combination of up to 40 of your favorite  
AM and FM radio stations.  
+
CH  
CH +/–  
ENTER  
VOL  
DISC  
ALBUM  
Tune into the AM or FM station  
1
-
you want to store as a preset.  
PREV  
CH  
MUTING  
Press the [MEMORY] button.  
The preset number flashes.  
2
MEMORY  
To select a preset, use the PRE-  
SET [ ]/[ ] buttons or the  
remote controller’s CH [+/–] but-  
ton.  
PRESET  
While the preset number is flash-  
ing (about 8 seconds), use the  
PRESET [ ]/[ ] buttons to  
3
+
CH  
DISC  
PRESET  
ALBUM  
select a preset from 1 through 40.  
-
Press the [MEMORY] button  
again to store the station.  
4
MEMORY  
Deleting Presets  
The station is stored and the preset  
number stops flashing.  
2
favorite stations.  
MASTER VOLUME  
STANDBY/ON  
STANDBY  
READY  
ZONE  
ZONE  
2
3
Note:  
You can name your radio presets for easy identifica-  
tion (see page 94).  
PURE AUDIO  
AUDIO SEL  
DVD  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
GAME/TV  
AUX  
1
AUX  
2
TAPE  
TUNER  
CD  
PHONO  
DISPLAY  
PUSH TO OPEN  
TUNING  
PRESET  
RETURN  
ZONE  
ZONE  
2
3
OFF  
LEVEL  
TONE  
HDMI OUT  
STEREO  
THX  
SETUP MIC  
AUX  
2
L
INPUT  
TUNING  
PHONES  
POWER  
RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE  
SETUP  
CLEAR  
ON  
OFF  
DIGITAL INPUT  
LISTENING MODE  
S
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
R
DIGITAL  
ENTER  
TUNING  
Select the preset that you want to  
delete.  
See the previous section.  
1
2
While holding down the [MEM-  
ORY] button, press the  
TUNING  
MEMORY MODE  
[TUNING MODE] button.  
The preset is deleted and its number  
disappears from the display.  
CLEAR  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Common Functions  
This section explains functions that can be used with any  
input source.  
Adjusting Speaker Levels  
You can adjust the volume of each speaker while listen-  
ing to an input source. These temporary adjustments are  
cancelled when the AV receiver is set to Standby.  
TAPE  
7
TUN
8
TV VOL  
PHONO  
D. TUN  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
CLEAR  
0
11  
12  
INPUT SELECTOR  
MACRO  
Use the remote controller’s  
Press  
[RECEIVER]  
first  
ZONE  
ZONE  
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE  
[CH SEL] button to select each  
speaker, and use the [LEVEL–]  
and [LEVEL+] buttons to adjust  
the volume.  
CH SEL  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
CDR/MD  
TV  
CABLE  
SAT  
DOCK  
RECEIVER  
TAPE/AMP  
SLEEP  
DIMMER  
DIMMER  
DISPLAY  
SLEEP  
You can adjust the volume of each  
speaker from –12 dB to +12 dB  
(–15 dB to +12 dB for the subwoofer).  
+
LEVEL  
LEVEL  
CH  
ENTER  
VOL  
DISC  
ALBUM  
-
PREV  
CH  
MUTING  
DISPLAY  
MUTING  
REC  
PLAYLIST  
RANDOM  
LISTENING MODE  
SURR  
Notes:  
STEREO  
You cannot use this function while the AV receiver is  
muted.  
REPEAT  
AUDIO  
DIRECT  
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE  
PURE  
A
THX  
ALL ST  
-
+
LEVEL  
TEST TONE  
CH SEL  
LEVEL  
CH SEL  
• Speakers that are set to No or None in the Speaker  
Configuration cannot be adjusted (see page 86).  
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF  
LEVEL – +  
AUDIO SEL  
VCR  
L
NIGHT  
Re-EQ  
HDD  
DVD  
RC-690  
M
Headphones  
While a pair of headphones is connected, you can use the  
[CH SEL], [LEVEL–], and [LEVEL+] buttons to adjust  
the volume of each headphone speaker (left and right),  
from –12 dB to +12 dB each.  
MASTER VOLUME  
STANDBY/ON  
STANDBY  
ZONE  
ZONE  
2
3
PURE AUDIO  
AUDIO SEL  
DVD  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
GAME/TV  
AUX  
1
AUX  
2
TAPE  
TUNER  
CD  
PHONO  
DISPLAY  
PUSH TO OPEN  
TUNING  
PRESET  
RETURN  
ZONE  
ZONE  
2
3
OFF  
LEVEL  
TONE  
HDMI OUT  
STEREO  
THX  
SETUP MIC  
AUX  
2
L
INPUT  
TUNING  
DIMMER MEMORY MODE  
PHONES  
SETUP  
CLEAR  
DIGITAL INPUT  
LISTENING MODE  
S
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
R
DIGITAL  
ENTER  
TUNING  
These settings are stored when the AV receiver is set to  
Standby.  
PHONES  
DIMMER  
DISPLAY  
Muting the AV Receiver  
Setting the Display Brightness  
You can temporarily mute the output of the AV receiver.  
You can adjust the brightness of the display.  
Press the remote controller’s  
[MUTING] button.  
The output is muted and the MUTING  
indicator flashes on the display.  
Press the remote controller’s  
[DIMMER] button repeatedly to  
Remote  
controller  
MUTING  
DIMMER  
select:  
• Normal + VOLUME light on.  
• Normal + VOLUME light off.  
• Dim + VOLUME light off.  
AV receiver  
DIMMER  
• Dimmer + VOLUME light off.  
To unmute the AV receiver, press the remote control-  
ler’s [MUTING] button again, or adjust the volume. The  
Muting is cancelled when the AV receiver is set to  
Standby.  
You can also use the AV receiver’s  
[DIMMER] button (not European mod-  
els).  
Tip:  
You can specify how much the output is muted with the  
Muting Level setting (see page 96).  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Common Functions—Continued  
Using the Sleep Timer  
Displaying Source Information  
With the sleep timer, you can set the AV receiver so that  
it turns off automatically after a specified period.  
You can display various information about the current  
input source as follows.  
Remote  
controller  
Press the remote controller’s  
Press the [DISPLAY] button  
repeatedly to cycle through the  
available information.  
SLEEP  
[SLEEP] button repeatedly to  
select the required sleep time.  
You can set the sleep time from 90 to 10  
minutes in 10 minute steps.  
DISPLAY  
AV receiver  
The SLEEP indicator appears on the  
display when the sleep timer has been  
set, as shown. The specified sleep time  
appears on the display for about 5 sec-  
onds, then the previous display reap-  
pears.  
DISPLAY  
The following information can typically be displayed:  
SLEEP indicator  
Input source  
Listening  
mode  
Signal format*  
To cancel the sleep timer, press the [SLEEP] button  
repeatedly until the SLEEP indicator disappears.  
To check the remaining sleep time, press the [SLEEP]  
button. Note that if you press the [SLEEP] button while  
the sleep time is being displayed, you’ll shorten the sleep  
time by 10 minutes.  
Sampling  
frequency  
*If the input signal is analog, no format information is  
displayed. If the input signal is PCM, the sampling fre-  
quency is displayed. If the input signal is digital but not  
PCM, the signal format and the number of channels is  
displayed. For some digital input signals, including mul-  
tichannel PCM, the signal format, number of channels,  
and sampling frequency is displayed.  
Using Headphones  
For private listening, you can connect a pair of stereo  
headphones (1/4-inch phone plug) to the AV receiver’s  
PHONES jack.  
Information is displayed for about 3 seconds, then the  
previous display reappears.  
STANDBY/ON  
STANDBY  
READY  
ZONE  
ZONE  
2
3
PURE AUDIO  
AUDIO
ZONE  
ZONE  
2
3
PHONES  
POWER  
ON  
OFF  
Notes:  
• Always turn down the volume before connecting your  
headphones.  
• While the headphones plug is inserted in the PHONES  
jack, the speakers are turned off and the Headphone  
indicator lights up. (The Powered Zone 2 speakers are  
not turned off.)  
• When you connect a pair of headphones, the listening  
mode is set to Stereo, unless it was already set to Pure  
Audio, Mono, Stereo, or Direct, in which case it stays  
the same.  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Common Functions—Continued  
Selecting Audio Inputs  
Specifying the Digital Signal Format  
1
2
REC  
PLAYLIST  
MASTER VOLUME  
LISTENING MODE  
SURR  
STANDBY/ON  
STEREO  
STANDBY  
READY  
REPEAT  
AUDIO  
DIRECT  
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE  
PURE  
A
THX  
ALL ST  
ZONE  
2
3
ZONE  
-
+
LEVEL  
TEST TONE  
CH SEL  
LEVEL  
PURE AUDIO  
AUDIO SEL  
DVD  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
GAME/TV  
AUX  
1
AUX  
2
TAPE  
TUNER  
CD  
PHONO  
DISPLAY  
PUSH TO OPEN  
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF  
TUNING  
PRESET  
RETURN  
ZONE  
ZONE  
2
3
OFF  
LEVEL  
TONE  
HDMI OUT  
STEREO  
THX  
SETUP MIC  
AUX  
2
L
INPUT  
TUNING  
PHONES  
POWER  
AUDIO SEL  
VCR  
L
NIGHT  
Re-EQ  
HDD  
RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE  
SETUP  
AUDIO SEL  
DVD  
CLEAR  
ON  
OFF  
DIGITAL INPUT  
LISTENING MODE  
S
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
R
DIGITAL  
ENTER  
TUNING  
RC-690  
M
Normally, the AV receiver detects the format of digital  
input signals automatically. However, if you experience  
either of the following issues when playing PCM or DTS  
sources, you can specify the signal format manually.  
• If the beginnings of tracks from a PCM source are cut  
off, try the PCM setting.  
If you connect a component to more than one audio  
input, such as a DVD player connected to analog, digital,  
multichannel, and HDMI inputs, you can use the  
[AUDIO SEL] button to select which audio input you  
want to use to listen to that component.  
Press the [AUDIO SEL] button  
• If noise is produced when fast forwarding or rewind-  
ing a DTS CD, try the DTS setting.  
repeatedly to select an audio  
AUDIO SEL  
input: HDMI > Auto > Multich >  
Analog.  
Press the [AUDIO SEL] button  
repeatedly to select Auto.  
1
IN, and the HDMI indicator  
appears on the display. (The  
HDMI IN must already be  
assigned to the current input  
selector. See page 48.)  
Auto: Selects the assigned COAX-  
IAL or OPTICAL DIGITAL  
IN, and the DIGITAL indica-  
tor appears on the display.  
(The DIGITAL IN must  
AUDIO SEL  
WhileAutois shown on the dis-  
play, use the Left and Right  
2
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:  
PCM: Only input signals in PCM  
format are output, and the  
PCM indicator lights up. The  
indicator flashes if the input  
signal is not PCM.  
already be assigned to the  
current input selector. See  
page 52.) If there is no digital  
signal, the analog input is  
used instead.  
DTS: Only input signals in DTS  
format are output, and the  
DTS indicator lights up. The  
indicator flashes if the input  
signal is not DTS.  
Multich:Selects the multichannel  
cator appears on the display.  
(The multichannel input must  
already be assigned to the  
current input selector. See  
page 54.)  
Auto(default):The format is detected  
automatically. If no digital  
input signal is present, the  
analog input is used instead.  
Analog: Selects the analog input, and  
the ANALOG indicator  
appears on the display.  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Selecting with the Remote Controller  
Selecting the Listening Modes  
For a description of each listening mode, see “About the  
Listening Modes” on page 76.  
+
CH  
ENTER  
VOL  
DISC  
ALBUM  
-
PREV  
• The Dolby Digital and DTS listening modes  
can only be selected if your DVD player is  
audio connection (coaxial, optical, or HDMI).  
CH  
DISPLAY  
MUTING  
REC  
PLAYLIST  
RANDOM  
• The listening modes you can select depends  
on the format of the input signal. To check  
the format, see “Displaying Source Informa-  
tion” on page 69.  
SURR  
LISTENING MODE  
SURR  
,
STEREO  
STEREO  
PURE A  
REPEAT  
AUDIO  
DIRECT  
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE  
PURE  
A
THX  
ALL ST  
ALL ST  
THX  
-
+
LEVEL  
TEST TONE  
CH SEL  
LEVEL  
DIRECT  
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF  
• While a pair of headphones is connected,  
you can only select the Pure Audio, Mono,  
Direct, or Stereo listening mode.  
AUDIO SEL  
VCR  
L
NIGHT  
Re-EQ  
HDD  
DVD  
RC-690  
M
Selecting on the AV Receiver  
[STEREO] button  
This button selects the Stereo listening mode.  
STEREO  
THX  
[SURR] button  
MASTER VOLUME  
This button selects the Dolby Digital and DTS listen-  
STANDBY/ON  
STANDBY  
READY  
ing modes.  
ZONE  
2
3
ZONE  
LISTENING MODE [ ]/[ ] buttons  
Pressing these buttons repeatedly cycles through all  
of the listening modes that can be used with the cur-  
rent input source.  
PURE AUDIO  
AUDIO SEL  
DVD  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
GAME/TV  
AUX  
1
AUX  
2
TAPE  
TUNER  
CD  
PHONO  
DISPLAY  
PUSH TO OPEN  
TUNING  
PRESET  
RETURN  
ZONE  
ZONE  
2
3
OFF  
LEVEL  
TONE  
HDMI OUT  
STEREO  
THX  
SETUP MIC  
AUX  
2
L
INPUT  
TUNING  
PHONES  
POWER  
RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE  
SETUP  
CLEAR  
ON  
OFF  
DIGITAL INPUT  
LISTENING MODE  
S
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
R
DIGITAL  
ENTER  
TUNING  
[PURE A] button  
LISTENING MODE  
PURE AUDIO  
This button selects the Pure Audio listening mode.  
When this mode is selected, the AV receiver’s dis-  
play is turned off and only the HDMI OUT outputs  
video signals.  
[PURE AUDIO] button  
This button selects the Pure Audio listening mode.  
When this mode is selected, the AV receiver’s dis-  
play is turned off and only the HDMI OUT outputs  
video signals. Pressing this button again will select  
the previous listening mode.  
[DIRECT] button  
This button selects the Direct listening mode.  
[THX] button  
[STEREO] button  
This button selects the THX listening modes.  
This button selects the Stereo listening mode.  
[ALL ST] button  
[THX] button  
This button selects the All Channel Stereo listening  
mode.  
This button selects the THX listening modes.  
LISTENING MODE [ ]/[ ] buttons  
Pressing these buttons repeatedly cycles through all  
of the listening modes that can be used with the cur-  
rent input source.  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Using the Listening Modes—Continued  
Listening Modes Available for Each Source Format  
Analog and PCM Sources  
PCM  
Multi  
Multichannel PCM  
32–96 kHz  
*/2  
176.4/192 kHz*1  
Source format  
channel  
analog  
176.4/  
192kHz*1  
32–96  
kHz  
except */2  
2ch 1/0, 1+1 Multichannel  
2ch  
Media  
CD, TV, radio,  
DVD  
DVD DVD  
Button  
Listening Mode  
[PURE A] Pure Audio  
[DIRECT] Direct  
[STEREO] Stereo  
Multichannel  
Dolby D  
Dolby D Plus  
DTS, DTS 96/24  
DTS-ES Discrete/Matrix  
DTS-HD High Resolution  
DTS-HD Master Audio  
Dolby TrueHD  
DSD  
Dolby PLII Movie/  
Dolby PLIIx Movie*2  
Dolby PLII Music/  
Dolby PLIIx Music*2  
Dolby PLII Game/  
Dolby PLIIx Game*2  
[SURR]  
Dolby Digital EX/Dolby EX  
Neo:6  
Neo:6 Cinema  
Neo:6 Music  
Neural THX 5.1  
Neural THX 7.1  
THX Cinema*3  
Dolby PLII/Dolby PLIIx  
THX*3  
*2  
*3  
Neo:6 THX*3  
Dolby PLII THX Games  
Mode  
[THX]  
Neo:6 THX Games Mode  
THX Surround EX  
THX Ultra2 Cinema  
THX Music Mode  
THX Games Mode  
Mono  
Mono Movie  
Orchestra  
3
*
Unplugged  
Studio-Mix  
TV Logic  
All Ch Stereo  
Full Mono  
T-D  
*1. DVD-Audio discs output multichannel 176.4/192 kHz PCM only via HDMI.  
*2. If there are no surround back speakers, or Powered Zone 2 is being used, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.  
*3. Available only when using surround speakers.  
*4. For T-D, Mono Movie, Orchestra, Unplugged, Studio-Mix, and TV Logic, PCM of 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz, and 96 kHz are processed at 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,  
and 88.2 kHz respectively.  
Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.  
Requires 7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using the Listening Modes—Continued  
DSD, Dolby Digital, and Dolby Digital Plus Sources  
DSD*1  
Dolby D  
Multichannel  
Dolby Digital Plus  
Multichannel  
Multichannel  
Source format  
2ch 1/0, 1+1  
2ch 1/0, 1+1  
except  
*/2  
except  
*/2  
3/2  
2ch  
SACD  
*/2  
*/2  
Media  
DVD, DTV, etc.  
Blu-ray, HD DVD  
Button  
Listening Mode  
[PURE A] Pure Audio  
[DIRECT] Direct  
[STEREO] Stereo  
Multichannel  
Dolby D  
*2  
*2  
Dolby D Plus  
DTS, DTS 96/24  
DTS-ES Discrete/Matrix  
DTS-HD High Resolution  
DTS-HD Master Audio  
Dolby TrueHD  
DSD  
Dolby PLII Movie/  
Dolby PLIIx Movie*3  
Dolby PLII Music/  
Dolby PLIIx Music*3  
Dolby PLII Game/  
Dolby PLIIx Game*3  
[SURR]  
Dolby Digital EX/Dolby EX  
Neo:6  
Neo:6 Cinema  
Neo:6 Music  
Neural THX 5.1  
Neural THX 7.1  
THX Cinema*4  
Dolby PLII/  
Dolby PLIIx THX  
Neo:6 THX  
Dolby PLIITHX Games Mode  
Neo:6 THX Games Mode  
THX Surround EX  
THX Ultra2 Cinema  
THX Music Mode  
THX Games Mode  
Mono  
[THX]  
Mono Movie  
Orchestra  
4
*
Unplugged  
Studio-Mix  
TV Logic  
All Ch Stereo  
Full Mono  
T-D  
*1. In listening modes other than DSD Direct, DSD sources are converted and handled as PCM.  
*2. If there are no surround back speakers, depending on the input signal, Dolby Digital may be used.  
*3. If there are no surround back speakers, or Powered Zone 2 is being used, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.  
*4. Available only when using surround speakers.  
Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.  
Requires 7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Listening Modes—Continued  
TrueHD and DTS Sources  
TrueHD*1  
DTS, DTS96/24  
Multichannel  
DTS-ES  
Discrete/  
Matrix  
Multichannel  
Source format  
2ch  
1/0, 1+1  
2ch  
1/0  
except  
*/2  
except  
*/2  
*/2  
*/2  
Media  
Blu-ray, HD DVD  
DVD, CD, etc.  
Button  
Listening Mode  
[PURE A] Pure Audio  
[DIRECT] Direct  
[STEREO] Stereo  
Multichannel  
Dolby D  
Dolby D Plus  
DTS, DTS 96/24  
*2  
DTS-ES Discrete/Matrix  
DTS-HD High Resolution  
DTS-HD Master Audio  
TrueHD  
DSD  
Dolby PLII Movie/  
Dolby PLIIx Movie*3  
Dolby PLII Music/  
Dolby PLIIx Music*3  
Dolby PLII Game/  
Dolby PLIIx Game*3  
[SURR]  
Dolby Digital EX/Dolby EX  
Neo:6  
Neo:6 Cinema  
Neo:6 Music  
Neural THX 5.1  
Neural THX 7.1  
THX Cinema*4  
Dolby PLII/  
Dolby PLIIx THX  
Neo:6 THX  
Dolby PLII THX Games Mode  
Neo:6 THX Games Mode  
THX Surround EX  
THX Ultra2 Cinema  
THX Music Mode  
THX Games Mode  
Mono  
[THX]  
Mono Movie  
Orchestra  
Unplugged  
Studio-Mix  
TV Logic  
4
*
All Ch Stereo  
Full Mono  
T-D  
*1. For 96 kHz TrueHD sources, only the Tone audio adjust function is available. 192 kHz TrueHD sources are not supported.  
*2. If there are no surround back speakers, or Powered Zone 2 is being used, DTS is used.  
*3. If there are no surround back speakers, or Powered Zone 2 is being used, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.  
*4. Available only when using surround speakers.  
*5. For T-D, Mono Movie, Orchestra, Unplugged, Studio-Mix, and TV Logic, DTS 96/24 is processed as DTS.  
Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.  
Requires 7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Listening Modes—Continued  
DTS-HD Sources  
DTS-HD Master Audio*1  
Multichannel  
DTS-HD High Resolution  
Multichannel  
except */2 */2  
Source format  
2ch  
1/0  
2ch  
1/0  
except */2  
*/2  
Media  
Blu-ray, HD DVD  
Blu-ray, HD DVD  
Button  
Listening Mode  
[PURE A] Pure Audio  
[DIRECT] Direct  
[STEREO] Stereo  
Multichannel  
Dolby D  
Dolby D Plus  
DTS, DTS 96/24  
DTS-ES Discrete/Matrix  
DTS-HD High Resolution  
DTS-HD Master Audio  
TrueHD  
DSD  
Dolby PLII Movie/  
Dolby PLIIx Movie*2  
Dolby PLII Music/  
Dolby PLIIx Music*2  
Dolby PLII Game/  
Dolby PLIIx Game*2  
*3  
*3  
[SURR]  
*3  
*3  
*3  
*3  
*3  
Dolby Digital EX/Dolby EX  
Neo:6  
*3  
*3  
Neo:6 Cinema  
Neo:6 Music  
Neural THX 5.1  
Neural THX 7.1  
THX Cinema*2  
Dolby PLII/  
Dolby PLIIx THX  
Neo:6 THX  
Dolby PLII THX Games  
Mode  
[THX]  
Neo:6 THX Games Mode  
THX Surround EX  
THX Ultra2 Cinema  
THX Music Mode  
THX Games Mode  
Mono  
*3  
*3  
*3  
*3  
Mono Movie  
Orchestra  
Unplugged  
Studio-Mix  
TV Logic  
All Ch Stereo  
Full Mono  
T-D  
*4  
*1. For 96 kHz DTS-HD Master Audio sources, only the Tone audio adjust function is available. 192 kHz DTS-HD Master Audio sources are processed  
at 96 kHz.  
*2. If there are no surround back speakers, or Powered Zone 2 is being used, Dolby Pro Logic II is used.  
*3. Depending on the source (e.g., 96 kHz sources), processing may be performed after DTS decoding.  
*4. Available only when using surround speakers.  
Requires 6.1/7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.  
Requires 7.1 speakers. Not available while Powered Zone 2 is being used.  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Listening Modes—Continued  
Dolby Digital  
About the Listening Modes  
Use this mode with DVDs that bear the Dolby Digital  
logo and Dolby Digital TV broadcasts. This is the most  
common digital surround-sound format, and it’ll put you  
right in the middle of the action, just like being in a  
movie theater or concert hall.  
The AV receiver’s listening modes can transform your  
listening room into a movie theater or concert hall, with  
high fidelity and stunning surround sound.  
Dolby EX  
Pure Audio  
This mode expands 5.1-channel sources for 6.1/7.1-  
channel playback. It’s especially suited to Dolby Digital  
EX soundtracks that include a matrix-encoded surround  
back channel. The additional channel adds an extra  
dimension and provides an enveloping surround sound  
experience, perfect for rotating and fly-by sound effects.  
In this mode, the display and video circuitry are turned  
off, minimizing possible noise sources for the ultimate in  
high-fidelity audio reproduction. (As the video circuitry  
is turned off, only the HDMI OUT outputs video.)  
Note:  
• The Pure Audio listening mode cannot be selected  
while Zone 2 is on.  
Dolby Digital Plus  
Developed for use with HDTV, including the new video  
disc formats Blu-ray and HD DVD, this is the latest mul-  
tichannel audio format from Dolby. It supports up to 7.1  
channels with 48 kHz/24-bit sampling rate and signal  
resolution.  
Direct  
In this mode, audio from the input source is output  
directly with minimal processing, providing high-fidel-  
ity reproduction. All of the source’s audio channels are  
output as they are.  
Dolby TrueHD  
Designed to take full advantage of the additional storage  
space offered by the new Blu-ray and HD DVD disc for-  
mats, this new Dolby format offers up to 7.1 discrete  
channels of lossless audio performance with 96 kHz/24-  
bit sampling rate and signal resolution.  
Stereo  
Sound is output by the front left and right speakers.  
Mono  
Use this mode when watching an old movie with a mono  
soundtrack, or use it with the foreign language  
soundtracks recorded in the left and right channels of  
some movies. It can also be used with DVDs or other  
sources containing multiplexed audio, such as karaoke  
DVDs.  
The AV receiver supports 7.1-channel sources up to  
96 kHz and 5.1-channel sources up to 192 kHz.  
DTS NEO:6  
This mode expands any 2-channel source for 7.1-chan-  
nel playback. It uses seven full-bandwidth channels of  
matrix decoding for matrix-encoded material, providing  
a very natural and seamless surround sound experience  
that fully envelops the listener.  
Multichannel  
This mode is for use with analog or PCM multichannel  
sources.  
• NEO:6 Cinema  
Use this mode with any stereo movie (e.g., TV,  
DVD, VHS).  
• NEO:6 Music  
Use this mode with any stereo music source (e.g.,  
CD, radio, cassette, TV, VHS, DVD).  
Dolby Pro Logic IIx  
This mode expands any 2-channel source for 7.1-chan-  
nel playback. It provides a very natural and seamless sur-  
round-sound experience that fully envelops the listener.  
As well as music and movies, video games can also ben-  
efit from the dramatic spatial effects and vivid imaging.  
DTS  
If you’re not using any surround back speakers, Dolby  
Pro Logic II will be used instead of Dolby Pro Logic IIx.  
• Dolby PLIIx Movie  
Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby Surround  
(Pro Logic) movie (e.g., TV, DVD, VHS).  
• Dolby PLIIx Music  
The DTS digital surround-sound format supports up to  
5.1 discrete channels and uses less compression for high-  
fidelity reproduction. Use it with DVDs and CDs that  
bear the DTS logo.  
DTS 96/24  
This mode is for use with DTS 96/24 sources. This is  
high-resolution DTS with a 96 kHz sampling rate and  
24-bit resolution, providing superior fidelity. Use it with  
DVDs that bear the DTS 96/24 logo.  
Use this mode with any stereo or Dolby Surround  
(Pro Logic) music source (e.g., CD, radio, cassette,  
TV, VHS, DVD).  
• Dolby PLIIx Game  
Use this mode with video games, especially those  
that bear the Dolby Pro Logic II logo.  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using the Listening Modes—Continued  
DTS-ES Discrete  
THX  
This mode is for use with DTS-ES Discrete soundtracks  
that use a discrete surround-back channel for true  
6.1/7.1-channel playback. The seven totally separate  
audio channels provide better spatial imaging and 360-  
degree sound localization, perfect for sounds that pan  
across the surround channels. Use it with DVDs that bear  
the DTS-ES logo, especially those with a DTS-ES Dis-  
crete soundtrack.  
Founded by George Lucas, THX develops stringent stan-  
dards that ensure movies are reproduced in movie the-  
aters and home theaters just as the director intended.  
• THX Cinema  
This mode is for watching movies, which are typi-  
cally recorded and edited on the assumption that they  
will be played in a sizable place like a movie theater.  
It carefully optimizes the tonal and spatial character-  
istics of the soundtrack for reproduction in the  
smaller home-theater environment. It can be used  
with 2-channel sources processed with other for-  
mats, and multichannel sources. Surround back  
speaker output depends on the source material and  
the selected listening mode.  
DTS-ES Matrix  
This mode is for use with DTS-ES Matrix soundtracks  
that use a matrix-encoded back-channel for 6.1/7.1-  
channel playback. Use it with DVDs that bear the DTS-  
ES logo.  
DTS-HD High Resolution  
• THX Ultra2 Cinema  
Developed for use with HDTV, including the new video  
disc formats Blu-ray and HD DVD, this is the latest mul-  
tichannel audio format from DTS. It supports up to 7.1  
channels with 96 kHz/24-bit sampling rate and signal  
resolution.  
This mode expands 5.1-channel sources for 7.1-  
channel playback. It does this by analyzing the com-  
position of the surround source, optimizing the  
ambient and directional sounds to produce the sur-  
round back channel output.  
DTS-HD Master Audio  
• THX Music Mode  
Designed to take full advantage of the additional storage  
space offered by the new Blu-ray and HD DVD disc for-  
mats, this new DTS format offers up to 7.1 discrete chan-  
nels of uncompressed digital audio with 96 kHz/24-bit  
sampling rate and signal resolution.  
This mode is designed for use with music. It expands  
5.1-channel sources for 7.1-channel playback.  
• THX Games Mode  
This mode is designed for use with video games. It  
can expand 2-channel and 5.1-channel sources for  
6.1/7.1-channel playback.  
The AV receiver supports 7.1-channel sources up to  
96 kHz and 5.1-channel sources up to 192 kHz.  
• THX Surround EX  
This mode expands 5.1-channel sources for 6.1/7.1-  
channel playback. It’s especially suited to Dolby  
Digital EX sources. THX Surround EX, also known  
as Dolby Digital Surround EX, is a joint develop-  
ment between Dolby Laboratories and THX Ltd.  
Neural THX 5.1/7.1  
Neural-THX Surround employs psychoacoustic fre-  
quency domain processing, which allows delivery of a  
more detailed sound stage, with superior channel separa-  
tion and localization of audio elements. The Neural THX  
5.1 and Neural THX 7.1 modes can expand any 2-chan-  
nel stereo source for 5.1- or 7.1-channel playback,  
respectively. Use them with CD, radio, cassette, TV,  
VHS, DVD, and other 2-channel stereo sources, includ-  
ing video games. Neural-THX Surround can also be  
used by broadcasters to encode and transmit surround-  
sound content over a stereo signal, which listeners can  
enjoy as either surround sound or normal stereo. XM  
Satellite Radio, for example, is using Neural-THX Sur-  
round on select channels, which the AV receiver can  
expand from 5.1 channels to 7.1 channels.  
DSD  
DSD stands for Direct Stream Digital and is the format  
used to store digital audio on SuperAudio CDs (SACD).  
This mode can be used with SACDs that feature multi-  
channel audio.  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Listening Modes—Continued  
Onkyo Original DSP Modes  
Mono Movie  
This mode is suitable for old movies and other mono  
sources. The center speaker outputs the sound as it is,  
while reverb is applied to the sound output by the other  
speakers, giving presence to even mono material.  
Orchestra  
Suitable for classical or operatic music, this mode  
emphasizes the surround channels in order to widen the  
stereo image and simulates the natural reverberation of a  
large hall.  
Unplugged  
Suitable for acoustic instruments, vocals, and jazz, this  
mode emphasizes the front stereo image, giving the  
impression of being right in front of the stage.  
Studio-Mix  
Suitable for rock or pop music, listening to music in this  
mode creates a lively sound field with a powerful acous-  
tic image, like being at a club or rock concert.  
TV Logic  
This mode adds realistic acoustics to TV shows pro-  
duced in a TV studio, surround effects to the entire  
sound, and clarity to voices.  
All Ch Stereo  
Ideal for background music, this mode fills the entire lis-  
tening area with stereo sound from the front, surround,  
and surround back speakers.  
Full Mono  
In this mode, all speakers output the same sound in  
mono, so the sound you hear is the same regardless of  
where you are within the listening room.  
T-D (Theater-Dimensional)  
With this mode, you can enjoy virtual 5.1 surround  
sound even with only two or three speakers. It works by  
controlling how sounds reach the listener’s left and right  
ears. Good results may not be possible if there’s too  
much reverb, so we recommend that you use this mode  
in an environment with little or no natural reverb.  
Note:  
• Since the Onkyo original DSP modes use the Dolby  
PLIIx and Neo:6 circuits for processing, when one of  
these modes is selected, the PLIIx indicator, or Neo:6  
indicator for multichannel sources, lights up.  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Recording  
This section explains how to record the input source and  
how to record audio and video from separate sources.  
Recording from Different AV Sources  
You can overdub audio onto your video recordings by  
simultaneously recording audio and video from two sep-  
arate sources. This is possible because only the audio  
source is switched when an audio-only input source,  
such as TAPE, TUNER, or CD, is selected, the video  
source remains the same.  
In the following example, audio from the CD player con-  
nected to the CD IN and video from the camcorder con-  
nected to the AUX 2 INPUT VIDEO jack are recorded  
by the VCR connected to the VCR/DVR OUT jacks.  
Notes:  
• The surround sound and DSP listening modes cannot  
be recorded.  
• Copy-protected DVDs cannot be recorded.  
• Sources connected to the analog multichannel input  
cannot be recorded.  
Various restrictions apply to digital recording. Refer to  
the manuals supplied with your digital recording  
equipment for more details.  
• Digital input signals are output by only the digital out-  
puts, and analog input signals are output by only the  
analog outputs. There is no internal conversion from  
digital to analog or vice versa.  
PUSH TO OPEN  
AUX  
2
INPUT  
VIDEO  
L
AUDIO  
R
S
VIDEO  
DIGITAL  
• DTS signals will be recorded as noise, so don’t  
attempt analog recording of DTS CDs or LDs.  
• While the Pure Audio listening mode is selected, the  
VCR/DVR OUT V and S jacks don’t output video sig-  
nals, so select another mode when recording.  
Camcorder  
video signal  
audio signal  
Recording the Input Source  
HDMI  
ASSIGNABLE  
RS232  
IN  
4
IN  
3
IN  
2
IN  
1
OUT  
ANTENNA  
Audio sources can be recorded to a recorder (e.g., cas-  
sette deck, CDR, MD) connected to the TAPE OUT or  
DIGITAL OPTICAL OUT jacks. Video sources can be  
recorded to a video recorder (e.g., VCR, DVR) con-  
nected to the VCR/DVR OUT jacks. See pages 27 to 43  
for hookup information.  
ASSIGNABLE  
MONITOR  
OUT  
AM  
FM75  
COMPONENT VIDEO  
IN IN IN 1(DVD)  
3
2
Y
MONITOR  
OUT  
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
DVD  
IR  
IN  
V
REMOTE  
C
B/PB  
ZONE  
OUT  
2
V
S
CONTROL  
ASSIGNABLE  
COAXIAL  
DIGITAL  
IN  
1
(DVD)  
C
R/PR  
S
OUT  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
IN  
FRONT CENTER  
SURR SURR BACK  
(VCR/DVR)  
IN  
IN  
IN  
IN  
2
3
1
2
L
L
(CBL/SAT)  
R
R
OPTICAL  
SUBWOOFER  
CENTER  
PHONO  
CD  
TAPE  
AUX  
1
GAME/TV CBL/SAT  
VCR/DVR  
SURR  
DVD  
MULTI CH  
(GAME/TV)  
(CD)  
GND  
SURR BACK  
Bi-AMP  
R
ZONE2  
R
FRONT  
R
R
SURR  
L
OUT  
(BTL)  
FRONT  
R
Use the input selector buttons to  
select the source that you want  
to record.  
1
DVD  
VCR/DVR CBL/SAT  
CD player  
VCR  
See “Which Connections Should I  
Use?” on page 28 to see which signals  
can be output and recorded.  
GAME/TV  
TAPE  
AUX 1  
AUX 2  
CD  
TUNER  
Prepare the camcorder and CD player for  
playback.  
You can watch the source while record-  
ing it. The AV receiver’s MASTER  
VOLUME control has no effect on  
recording.  
PHONO  
1
Remote  
controller  
Prepare the VCR for recording.  
DVD  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
2
3
4
1
GAME/TV  
4
2
AUX1  
5
3
AUX  
6
2
Press the [AUX 2] input selector button.  
TAPE  
7
TUNER  
8
CD  
9
PHONO  
+10  
Press the [CD] input selector button.  
This selects the CD player as the audio source but  
leaves the camcorder as the video source.  
On your recorder, start record-  
ing.  
2
Start recording on the VCR, then start  
playback on the camcorder and CD player.  
Video from the camcorder and audio from the CD  
player are recorded by the VCR.  
5
On the source component, start  
playback.  
3
Note:  
• If you select a different input source during recording,  
that input source will be recorded instead.  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Onscreen Setup Menus  
The onscreen setup menus appear on the connected TV and provide a conve-  
nient way to change the AV receiver’s various settings. Settings are organized  
into eight categories on the main menu, most containing a submenu.  
Menu  
1.Input/Output Assign  
2.Speaker Setup  
3.Audio Adjust  
4.Source Setup  
5.ListeningMode Preset  
6.Miscellaneous  
7.Hardware Setup  
8.Lock Setup  
Menu Map  
The following map shows how the setup menus are organized. Use the page numbers to locate information about items.  
Main menu  
Submenu  
Menu  
1.Input/Output Assign  
pages 46–54  
1.Input/Output Assign  
2.Speaker Setup  
3.Audio Adjust  
1.Monitor Out  
2.HDMI Input  
3.Component Video Input  
4.Digital Input  
5.Analog Input  
4.Source Setup  
5.Listening Mode Preset  
6.Miscellaneous  
7.Hardware Setup  
8.Lock Setup  
2.Speaker Setup  
pages 86–92  
page 45  
1.Speaker Settings  
2.Speaker Config  
3.Speaker Distance  
4.Level Calibration  
5.Equalizer Settings  
6.THX Audio Setup  
6.Miscellaneous  
page 96  
3.Audio Adjust  
page 82  
1.Volume Setup  
2.OSD Setup  
page 60  
1.Tone Control  
2.Direct  
3.Multiplex/Mono  
4.PL x/Neo:6  
5.Dolby EX  
6.Theater-Dimensional  
7.LFE Level  
7.Hardware Setup  
page 98  
1.Remote Control  
2.Zone2/Zone3  
3.Tuner  
4.Analog Multich  
5.HDMI  
4.Source Setup  
pages 93–94  
page 61  
DVD  
1.IntelliVolume  
2.A/V Sync  
3.Name Edit  
4.Satellite Radio  
5.SIRIUS Parental Lock  
8.Lock Setup  
page 100  
5.Listening Mode Preset  
<
>
Lock  
Unlocked  
page 84  
1.DVD  
2.VCR/DVR  
3.CBL/SAT  
4.GAME/TV  
5.AUX1  
6.AUX2  
7.TAPE  
8.TUNER  
9.CD  
10.PHONO  
Note:  
• The design of the TX-SR805 and TX-SR875 onscreen setup menus is slightly different. The TX-SR805 onscreen  
setup menus are used throughout this instruction manual.  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Adjusting the Listening Modes  
Using the Late Night Function  
With the Late Night function, you can reduce the  
dynamic range of Dolby Digital material so that you can  
still hear quiet parts even when listening at low volume  
levels—ideal for watching movies late at night when you  
don’t want to disturb anyone.  
ON  
STANDBY  
TV  
INPUT  
DVD  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
3
+
TV CH  
-
1
GAME/TV  
4
2
AUX1  
5
AUX  
6
2
TAPE  
7
TUNER  
8
CD  
9
TV VOL  
PHONO  
D. TUN  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
INPUT SELECTOR  
MACRO  
CLEAR  
12  
0
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE  
MODE button, and then press the  
[L NIGHT] button repeatedly.  
For Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital  
Plus sources, the options are:  
11  
RECEIVER  
ZONE  
ZONE  
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
CDR/MD  
TV  
CABLE  
SAT  
DOCK  
RECEIVER  
TAPE/AMP  
SLEEP  
RECEIVER  
DIMMER  
L NIGHT  
Off: Late Night function off  
(default).  
Low: Small reduction in dynamic  
+
ENTER  
SETUP  
CH  
ENTER  
VOL  
DISC  
ALBUM  
-
range.  
PREV  
CH  
High: Large reduction in dynamic  
DISPLAY  
MUTING  
range.  
REC  
PLAYLIST  
RANDOM  
For Dolby TrueHD sources, the options  
are:  
LISTENING MODE  
SURR  
STEREO  
Auto: The dynamic range is con-  
trolled automatically based  
on the source material and the  
current volume setting  
REPEAT  
AUDIO  
DIRECT  
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE  
PURE  
A
THX  
ALL ST  
-
+
LEVEL  
TEST TONE  
CH SEL  
LEVEL  
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF  
AUDIO SEL  
VCR  
L
NIGHT  
Re-EQ  
HDD  
Re-EQ  
DVD  
(default).  
L NIGHT  
RC-690  
M
Off: Late Night function off.  
On: Late Night function on.  
Notes:  
• The Late Night function can be used only when the  
input source is Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, or  
Dolby TrueHD.  
Using the Re-EQ Function  
With the Re-EQ function, you can compensate a  
soundtrack whose high-frequency content is too harsh,  
making it more suitable for home theater viewing.  
• The effect of the Late Night function depends on the  
material that you are playing and the intention of the  
original sound designer, and with some material there  
will be little or no effect when you select the different  
options.  
This function can be used with the following listening  
modes: Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Pro  
Logic II Movie, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, DTS, DTS-  
ES, DTS Neo:6 Cinema, DTS 96/24, THX Cinema,  
THX Surround EX, THX Ultra2 Cinema, and Multi-  
channel.  
• The Late Night function is set to Off when the AV  
receiver is set to Standby. For Dolby TrueHD sources,  
it will be set to Auto.  
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE  
MODE button, followed by the  
RECEIVER  
[Re-EQ] button.  
Press the [Re-EQ] button again to turn  
off the Re-EQ function.  
Re-EQ  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Adjusting the Listening Modes—Continued  
Tone Control Settings  
Audio Adjust  
You can adjust the tone (bass and treble) of the front,  
center, surround, and surround back speakers individu-  
ally. For the subwoofer, you can adjust the bass.  
With the Audio Adjust functions and settings, you can  
adjust the sound and listening modes as you like.  
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE  
MODE button, followed by the  
[SETUP] button.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
1
Bass  
RECEIVER  
You can boost or cut low-frequency sounds from –10 dB  
to +10 dB in 1 dB steps.  
Treble  
You can boost or cut high-frequency sounds from  
–10 dB to +10 dB in 1 dB steps.  
Note:  
• The tone control circuits are bypassed when the Direct  
or Pure Audio listening mode is selected.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “3. Audio  
]
2
Adjust,and then press [ENTER].  
ENTER  
The Audio Adjust menu appears.  
Adjusting the Tone on the AV Receiver  
3.Audio Adjust  
1
2
1.Tone Control  
2.Direct  
MASTER VOLUME  
3.Multiplex/Mono  
4.PL x/Neo:6  
5.Dolby EX  
STANDBY/ON  
ENTER  
STANDBY  
READY  
6.Theater-Dimensional  
7.LFE Level  
ZONE  
2
3
ZONE  
PURE AUDIO  
AUDIO SEL  
DVD  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
GAME/TV  
AUX  
1
AUX  
2
TAPE  
TUNER  
CD  
PHONO  
DISPLAY  
PUSH TO OPEN  
TUNING  
PRESET  
RETURN  
ZONE  
ZONE  
2
3
OFF  
LEVEL  
TONE  
HDMI OUT  
STEREO  
THX  
SETUP MIC  
AUX  
2
L
INPUT  
TUNING  
PHONES  
POWER  
RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE  
SETUP  
CLEAR  
ON  
OFF  
DIGITAL INPUT  
LISTENING MODE  
S
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
R
DIGITAL  
ENTER  
TUNING  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select an item, and  
then press [ENTER].  
]
3
4
Press the AV receiver’s [TONE]  
button repeatedly to select Bass  
or Treble for Front, Center, Sur-  
round, SurrBack, or Subwoofer.  
ENTER  
1
2
The screen for that item appears.  
TONE  
ENTER  
Use the Up [ ] and Down [  
buttons to adjust.  
]
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select an option, and  
]
use the Left and Right [ ]/[  
buttons to change it.  
The Audio Adjust menu items are  
explained below.  
]
ENTER  
Notes:  
• The tone cannot be adjusted on the AV receiver when  
the Direct or Pure Audio listening mode is selected.  
• The tone control settings do not apply to the THX lis-  
tening modes.  
ENTER  
When you’ve finished, press the  
[SETUP] button.  
5
Setup closes.  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Adjusting the Listening Modes—Continued  
Direct Setting  
PLIIx/Neo:6 Settings  
Delay Enable  
PLIIx Music (2 ch Input)  
These settings apply to only 2-channel stereo sources.  
DSD  
If you’re not using any surround back speakers, these  
settings apply to Dolby Pro Logic II, not Dolby Pro  
Logic IIx.  
This setting determines whether or not DSD (SACD)  
audio signals are passed through the DSP for A/V Sync,  
delay, etc., processing when the PureAudio or Direct lis-  
tening mode is selected.  
Panorama  
No: DSD signals are not processed by the DSP.  
Yes: DSD signals are processed by the DSP.  
With this setting, you can broaden the width of the front  
stereo image when using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music  
listening mode.  
On: Panorama function on.  
Off: Panorama function off (default).  
Multiplex/Mono Settings  
Multiplex  
Dimension  
With this setting, you can move the sound field forward  
or backward when using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music  
listening mode. It can be adjusted from –3 to +3. The  
default value is 0. Higher settings move the sound field  
forward. Lower settings move it backward.  
Input Ch  
This setting determines which channel of a stereo multi-  
plex source is output. Use it to select audio channels or  
languages with multiplex sources, multilingual TV  
broadcasts, and so on.  
If the stereo image feels too wide, or there’s too much  
surround sound, move the sound field forward to  
improve the balance. Conversely, if the stereo image  
feels like it’s in mono, or there’s not enough surround  
sound, move it backward.  
Main: The main channel is output (default).  
Sub: The sub channel is output.  
Main/Sub: Both the main and sub channels are out-  
put.  
Center Width  
Mono  
With this setting, you can adjust the width of the sound  
from the center speaker when using the Dolby Pro Logic  
IIx Music listening mode. Normally, if you’re using a  
center speaker, the center channel sound is output by  
only the center speaker. (If you’re not using a center  
speaker, the center channel sound will be distributed to  
the front left and right speakers to create a phantom cen-  
ter). This setting controls the front left, right, and center  
mix, allowing you to adjust the weight of the center  
channel sound. It can be adjusted from 0 to 7. The default  
value is 3.  
Input Ch  
This setting determines which channel is output when  
the Mono listening mode is used with a stereo source.  
L+R: Both the left and right channels are output  
(default).  
L: Only the left channel is output.  
R: Only the right channel is output.  
Output Speaker  
This setting determines which speakers output mono  
audio when the Mono listening mode is selected.  
L/R: Mono audio is output by the front left and right  
Neo:6 Music  
speakers.  
Center Image  
This setting is unavailable if no surround speakers are  
connected.  
C: Mono audio is output by the center speaker  
(default).  
The DTS Neo:6 Music listening mode creates 6-channel  
surround sound from 2-channel stereo sources. With this  
setting, you can specify by how much the front left and  
right channel output is attenuated in order to create the  
center channel. It can be adjusted from 0 to 5. The  
default value is 3.  
When set to 0, the front left and right channel output is  
attenuated by half (–6 dB), giving the impression that the  
sound is located centrally. This setting works well when  
the listening position is considerably off center. When  
set to 5, the front left and right channels are not attenu-  
ated, maintaining the original stereo balance.  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Adjusting the Listening Modes—Continued  
Dolby Digital Settings  
Listening Mode Presets  
On the Listening Mode Preset menu, you can specify a  
default listening mode for each of the audio formats sup-  
ported by each input selector. The AV receiver will then  
select the listening mode automatically depending on the  
format of the input signal. You can still select the other  
listening modes, although the default listening mode will  
be used the next time you turn on the AV receiver.  
Dolby EX  
This setting determines how Dolby EX signals are han-  
dled. If you’re not using any surround back speakers, or  
Powered Zone 2 is being used (page 101), this setting is  
unavailable.  
Auto: When the source is Dolby EX, you can select  
the Dolby EX or THX Surround EX listening  
mode.  
INPUT SELECTOR  
MA
Manual:When the source is Dolby EX, you can select  
any of the listening modes compatible with this  
format (e.g., Dolby EX, Dolby Pro Logic IIx,  
etc.).  
ZONE  
2
1
2
REMOTE MODE  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
CDR/MD  
TV  
CABLE  
SAT  
DOCK  
RECEIVER  
TAPE/AMP  
SLEEP  
RECEIVER  
DIMMER  
+
ENTER  
SETUP  
CH  
ENTER  
VOL  
DISC  
ALBUM  
T–D (Theater-Dimensional) Setting  
-
PREV  
CH  
Listening Angle  
DISPLAY  
MUTING  
With this setting, you can optimize the Theater-Dimen-  
sional listening mode by specifying the angle of the front  
left and right speakers relative to the listening position.  
Ideally, the front left and right speakers should be equi-  
distant from the listening position and at an angle close  
to one of the two available settings.  
LIST  
RANDOM  
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE  
MODE button, followed by the  
[SETUP] button.  
Front left speaker  
Front right speaker  
1
RECEIVER  
30˚  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
Narrow:Select if the angle is less than 30 degrees.  
Wide: Select if the angle is greater than 30 degrees.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
2
buttons to select “5. Listening  
Mode Preset,and then press  
[ENTER].  
ENTER  
LFE Level Settings  
The Listening Mode Preset menu  
appears.  
With these settings, you can set the level of the LFE  
(Low Frequency Effects) channel individually for Dolby  
Digital, DTS, and multichannel PCM sources. The level  
can be set to –, –20 dB, –10 dB, or 0 dB (default).  
5.Listening Mode Preset  
ENTER  
1.DVD  
2.VCR/DVR  
3.CBL/SAT  
4.GAME/TV  
5.AUX1  
6.AUX2  
7.TAPE  
If you find that low-frequency effects are too loud when  
using one of these sources, change the setting to –20 dB  
or –dB.  
8.TUNER  
9.CD  
10.PHONO  
Dolby D  
Sets the level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital  
sources.  
DTS  
Sets the level of the LFE channel for DTS sources.  
Multich PCM  
Sets the level of the LFE channel for multichannel PCM  
sources. (Multichannel PCM is input via HDMI.)  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Adjusting the Listening Modes—Continued  
192/176.4k: Specifies the default lis-  
tening mode for high resolution  
192 kHz and 176.4 kHz digital sources,  
such as DVD-Audio.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
3
buttons to select an input selec-  
tor, and then press [ENTER].  
The audio formats supported by that  
input selector appear.  
ENTER  
Dolby TrueHD: Specifies the default  
listening mode for Dolby TrueHD  
sources, such as Blu-ray or HD DVD  
(input via HDMI).  
5-x.Listening Mode Preset  
Analog/PCM  
Dolby Digital  
DTS  
D.F.2ch  
D.F.Mono  
Last Valid  
Last Valid  
Last Valid  
Last Valid  
Last Valid  
ENTER  
DTS-HD Master Audio: Specifies the  
default listening mode for DTS-HD  
Master Audio sources, such as Blu-ray  
or HD DVD (input via HDMI).  
If the input selector is assigned to an  
HDMI IN, use the Down [ ] button to  
select the audio formats shown on the  
following screen.  
DSD Multi: Specifies the default lis-  
tening mode for DSD multichannel  
sources, such as SACD.  
When you’ve finished, press the  
[SETUP] button.  
Setup closes.  
5-x.Listening Mode Preset  
5
Multich PCM  
192k/176.4k  
Dolby True HD  
DTS-HD Master Audio  
DSD  
Last Valid  
Last Valid  
Last Valid  
Last Valid  
Last Valid  
For the TUNER input selector, Analog  
is the only format available.  
Note:  
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV  
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow  
buttons.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
4
buttons to select an audio for-  
ENTER  
[
]/[ ] buttons to select a lis-  
tening mode.  
Only listening modes compatible with  
the audio format can be selected (see  
page 72).  
Analog/PCM: Specifies the default lis-  
tening mode for analog and PCM  
sources.  
ENTER  
Dolby Digital: Specifies the default lis-  
tening mode for Dolby Digital sources.  
DTS: Specifies the default listening  
mode for DTS sources.  
D.F. 2ch: Specifies the default listening  
mode for 2-channel (2/0) stereo sources  
in a digital format, such as Dolby Digi-  
tal or DTS.  
D.F. Mono: Specifies the default listen-  
ing mode for mono sources in a digital  
format, such as Dolby Digital or DTS.  
Multich PCM: Specifies the default  
listening mode for multichannel PCM  
sources, such as DVD-Audio (input via  
HDMI).  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Setup  
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE  
MODE button, followed by the  
[SETUP] button.  
Speaker Setup  
1
2
This section explains items on the Speaker Config menu.  
RECEIVER  
Some of the speaker settings are set automatically by the  
Automatic Speaker Setup function (see page 55).  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
INPUT SELECTOR  
MA
ZONE  
2
1
2
REMOTE MODE  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
CDR/MD  
TV  
CABLE  
SAT  
DOCK  
RECEIVER  
TAPE/AMP  
SLEEP  
RECEIVER  
DIMMER  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “2. Speaker  
]
+
ENTER  
SETUP  
Setup,and then press [ENTER].  
The Speaker Setup menu appears.  
CH  
ENTER  
VOL  
DISC  
ALBUM  
ENTER  
-
PREV  
CH  
2.Speaker Setup  
DISPLAY  
MUTING  
1.Speaker Settings  
2.Speaker Config  
3.Speaker Distance  
4.Level Calibration  
5.Equalizer Settings  
6.THX Audio Setup  
ENTER  
LIST  
RANDOM  
Speaker Settings  
See “Speaker Settings” on page 45.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “2. Speaker  
Config,and then press [ENTER].  
]
3
4
ENTER  
Speaker Configuration  
The Speaker Config screen appears.  
2-2.Speaker Config  
These settings are set automatically by the Automatic  
Speaker Setup function (see page 55).  
Subwoofer  
Front  
Center  
Surround  
Surr Back  
Surr Back Ch  
LPF of LFE  
Double Bass  
Yes  
Full Band  
100Hz  
100Hz  
100Hz  
2ch  
ENTER  
With the Speaker Configuration settings, you can specify  
which speakers are connected and a crossover frequency  
for each speaker.  
120Hz  
On  
The following crossover frequencies can be specified:  
Full Band, 40 Hz, 50 Hz, 60 Hz, 70 Hz, 80 Hz (THX),  
90 Hz, 100 Hz, 120 Hz, 150 Hz, or 200 Hz.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “Subwoofer,”  
and then use the Left and Right  
]
Specify Full Band for speakers that can output low-fre-  
quency bass sounds adequately, for example, speakers  
with a good sized woofer. For smaller speakers, specify  
a crossover frequency. Sounds below the crossover fre-  
quency will then be output by the subwoofer instead of  
the speaker. Refer to your speakers’ manuals to deter-  
mine the optimum crossover frequencies.  
ENTER  
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:  
Yes: Select if a subwoofer is con-  
nected.  
No: Select if no subwoofer is con-  
nected.  
ENTER  
If you’re using THX-certified speakers, specify  
80 Hz (THX) for all speakers.  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Advanced Setup—Continued  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “Front,and  
then use the Left and Right  
]
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “Surr Back,”  
and then use the Left and Right  
]
5
8
ENTER  
ENTER  
[
]/[ ] buttons to select a  
[
]/[ ] buttons to select a  
crossover frequency.  
crossover frequency.  
If no surround back speakers are con-  
nected, select None.  
Note:  
• Fixed at Full Band if Subwoofer  
(step 4) is set to No.  
Notes:  
• Cannot be set if Speaker Type is set  
to Bi-Amp or BTL (page 45), Sur-  
round is set to None (step 7), or Pow-  
ered Zone 2 is being used  
(page 103).  
ENTER  
ENTER  
• Cannot select Full Band if Surround  
(step 7) is set to anything other than  
Full Band.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “Center,and  
then use the Left and Right  
]
6
ENTER  
[
]/[ ] buttons to select a  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to selectSurr Back Ch,”  
and then use the Left and Right  
]
9
If no center speaker is connected, select  
None.  
ENTER  
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:  
1ch: Select if one surround back  
speaker is connected.  
Notes:  
• Cannot set if Speaker Type is set to  
BTL (page 45).  
ENTER  
2ch: Select if two (left and right)  
surround back speakers are  
connected.  
• Cannot select Full Band if Front  
(step 5) is set to anything other than  
Full Band.  
ENTER  
Note:  
• Cannot be set if Speaker Type is set  
to Bi-Amp or BTL (page 45), Surr-  
Back is set to None (step 8), or Pow-  
ered Zone 2 is being used  
(page 103).  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to selectSurround,and  
then use the Left and Right  
]
7
ENTER  
[
]/[ ] buttons to select a  
If no surround left and right speakers  
are connected, select None.  
Continue with step 10 on the next page.  
Notes:  
• Cannot set if Speaker Type is set to  
BTL (page 45).  
ENTER  
• Cannot select Full Band if Front  
(step 5) is set to anything other than  
Full Band.  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Advanced Setup—Continued  
Low-Pass Filter for the LFE Channel  
Double Bass  
This setting is not set automatically by the Automatic  
This setting is not set automatically by the Automatic  
Speaker Setup function (see page 55).  
Speaker Setup function (see page 55).  
With this setting, you can specify the cutoff frequency of  
the LFE channel’s low-pass filter (LPF), which can be  
used to filter out unwanted hum. The LPF only applies to  
sources that use the LFE channel.  
With this setting, you can boost bass output by feeding  
front left and right channel bass sounds to the subwoofer.  
This setting can only be made if the Subwoofer setting in  
step 4 is set to Yes, and the Front setting in step 5 is set  
to Full Band.  
*If you’re using THX-certified speakers, select  
80 Hz (THX).  
*If you’re using THX-certified speakers, select Off  
(THX).  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “LPF of LFE,”  
and then use the Left and Right  
]
10  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “Double Bass,”  
and then use the Left and Right  
]
11  
ENTER  
[
]/[ ] buttons to select a low-  
ENTER  
pass filter frequency.  
[
]/[ ] buttons to select:  
The following low-pass filter frequen-  
cies can be selected: 80 Hz (THX),  
90 Hz, 100 Hz, or 120 Hz.  
Off(THX):The subwoofer only out-  
puts the LFE channel.  
On: In addition to LFE channel  
sounds, the subwoofer out-  
puts front left and right chan-  
nel bass sounds.  
ENTER  
ENTER  
Continue with step 11 in the next col-  
umn.  
Press the [SETUP] button.  
Setup closes.  
12  
Note:  
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV  
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow  
buttons.  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Setup—Continued  
Speaker Distance  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to selectUnit,and then  
use the Left and Right [ ]/[  
buttons to select:  
]
4
5
These settings are set automatically by the Automatic  
Speaker Setup function (see page 55).  
]
ENTER  
feet: Select if you want to enter  
distances in feet. Can be set  
from 0.5 to 30 feet in 0.5-foot  
steps.  
With the Speaker Distance settings, you can specify the  
distance from each speaker to the listening position.  
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE  
MODE button, followed by the  
[SETUP] button.  
1
meters: Select if you want to enter  
distances in meters. Can be  
set from 0.15 to 9 meters in  
0.15-meter steps.  
ENTER  
RECEIVER  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select a speaker, and  
use the Left and Right [ ]/[  
]
]
ENTER  
buttons to specify the distance.  
to your listening position.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “2. Speaker  
Setup,and then press [ENTER].  
]
2
3
Notes:  
ENTER  
• The Center distance cannot be set if  
(page 45), or Center is set to None in  
the Speaker Configuration (page 86).  
The Speaker Setup menu appears.  
ENTER  
2.Speaker Setup  
1.Speaker Settings  
2.Speaker Config  
3.Speaker Distance  
4.Level Calibration  
5.Equalizer Settings  
6.THX Audio Setup  
• The Surr Right and Surr Left dis-  
tances cannot be set if Speaker Type  
is set to BTL (page 45), or Surround  
uration (page 86).  
ENTER  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
• The Surr Back R and Surr Back L  
Type is set to Bi-Amp or BTL  
(page 45), Surr Back is set to None in  
the Speaker Configuration (page 86),  
or Powered Zone 2 is being used  
(page 103).  
buttons to select3. Speaker Dis-  
tance,and then press [ENTER].  
The Speaker Distance screen appears.  
ENTER  
2-3.Speaker Distance  
Unit  
Left  
Center  
Right  
Surr Right  
Surr Back R  
Surr Back L  
Surr Left  
Subwoofer  
feet  
12.0ft  
12.0ft  
12.0ft  
12.0ft  
12.0ft  
12.0ft  
12.0ft  
12.0ft  
• The Subwoofer distance cannot be  
set if Subwoofer is set to No (step 4).  
ENTER  
Repeat step 5 for each speaker.  
6
7
Note:  
Press the [SETUP] button.  
Setup closes.  
• Speakers that you set to No or None  
in the Speaker Configuration  
(page 86) cannot be selected.  
Note:  
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV  
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow  
buttons.  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced Setup—Continued  
Speaker Level Calibration  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
3
buttons to select “4. Level Cali-  
bration,and then press  
[ENTER].  
These settings are set automatically by the Automatic  
Speaker Setup function (see page 55).  
ENTER  
The Level Calibration screen appears  
and the pink noise test tone is output by  
the front left speaker.  
With the Level Calibration settings, you can adjust the  
level of each speaker while listening to the test tone so  
that the volume of each speaker is the same at the listen-  
ing position.  
ENTER  
2-4.Level Calibration  
Left  
Center  
Right  
Surr Right  
Surr Back R  
Surr Back L  
Surr Left  
Subwoofer  
-12.0dB  
-12.0dB  
-12.0dB  
-12.0dB  
-12.0dB  
-12.0dB  
-12.0dB  
-15.0dB  
Note:  
• The test tone is output at the standard level for THX,  
which is 0 dB (absolute volume setting 82). If you nor-  
mally listen at volume settings below this, be careful  
because the test tone will be much louder.  
Note:  
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE  
• Levels cannot be adjusted for speak-  
ers set to No or None in the Speaker  
Configuration (page 86).  
1
MODE button, followed by the  
[SETUP] button.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
RECEIVER  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select a speaker, and  
]
4
5
use the Left and Right [ ]/[  
Levels can be adjusted from –12 to  
+12 dB in 0.5 dB steps (–15 to +12 dB  
for the subwoofer).  
]
ENTER  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “2. Speaker  
]
2
Setup,and then press [ENTER].  
Repeat step 4 for each speaker  
so that the volume of the test  
tone from each speaker is the  
same.  
ENTER  
The Speaker Setup menu appears.  
2.Speaker Setup  
1.Speaker Settings  
2.Speaker Config  
3.Speaker Distance  
4.Level Calibration  
5.Equalizer Settings  
6.THX Audio Setup  
If you’re using a handheld sound level  
meter, adjust the level of each speaker  
so that it reads 75 dB SPL at the listen-  
ing position, measured with C-weight-  
ing and slow reading.  
ENTER  
Press the [SETUP] button.  
Setup closes.  
6
Note:  
• Speaker levels can also be adjusted by using the dedi-  
cated buttons on the remote controller. Press the  
[TEST TONE] button to output the test tone. Use the  
[CH SEL] button to select each speaker, and use the  
[LEVEL–] and [LEVEL+] buttons to adjust the level.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Advanced Setup—Continued  
Equalizer Settings  
Use the Left and Right [ ]/[  
buttons to set the “Equalizer”  
option to:  
Off: Equalizer off, flat response.  
Manual:The equalizer for each  
speaker can be set manually.  
Audyssey:The equalizer for each  
speaker is set automatically  
by the Automatic Speaker  
]
4
These settings are set automatically by the Automatic  
Speaker Setup function (see page 55).  
ENTER  
With the Equalizer settings, you can adjust the tone of  
speakers individually with a 7-band equalizer. The vol-  
ume of each speaker can be set on page 90.  
Setup function.  
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE  
MODE button, followed by the  
[SETUP] button.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
1
If you selected Manual, continue with  
the next step. If you selected Off or  
Audyssey, go to step 8.  
RECEIVER  
Use the Down [ ] button to  
select “Channel,and then use  
the Left and Right [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select the speaker.  
You can select: Front, Center, Sur-  
round, Surr Back, or Subwoofer.  
5
6
ENTER  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “2. Speaker  
Setup,and then press [ENTER].  
]
2
3
ENTER  
The Speaker Setup menu appears.  
ENTER  
2.Speaker Setup  
1.Speaker Settings  
2.Speaker Config  
3.Speaker Distance  
4.Level Calibration  
5.Equalizer Settings  
6.THX Audio Setup  
ENTER  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
buttons to select a frequency,  
and use the Left and Right  
ENTER  
[
]/[ ] buttons to cut or boost  
that frequency.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
You can select: 63 Hz, 160 Hz, 400 Hz,  
1000 Hz, 2500 Hz, 6300 Hz, or  
16000 Hz. And for the subwoofer,  
25 Hz, 40 Hz, 63 Hz, 100 Hz, or  
160 Hz.  
buttons to select “5. Equalizer  
Settings,and then press  
[ENTER].  
ENTER  
The Equalizer Settings screen appears.  
ENTER  
2-5.Equalizer Settings  
Each band can be cut or boosted from  
–6 dB to +6 dB in 1 dB steps.  
Equalizer  
Channel  
63Hz  
Manual  
Front  
0dB  
ENTER  
160Hz  
400Hz  
1000Hz  
2500Hz  
6300Hz  
16000Hz  
0dB  
0dB  
0dB  
0dB  
0dB  
0dB  
Tip: Low frequencies, such as 160 Hz,  
affect bass sounds; high frequencies,  
such as 6300 Hz, affect treble sounds.  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Advanced Setup—Continued  
Use the Up [ ] button to select  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “2. Speaker  
Setup,and then press [ENTER].  
]
7
2
“Channel” again, and use the  
Left and Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to  
select another speaker.  
ENTER  
ENTER  
The Speaker Setup menu appears.  
Repeat steps 6 and 7 for each speaker.  
2.Speaker Setup  
1.Speaker Settings  
2.Speaker Config  
3.Speaker Distance  
4.Level Calibration  
5.Equalizer Settings  
6.THX Audio Setup  
ENTER  
ENTER  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
3
4
buttons to select “6.THX Audio  
Setup,and then press [ENTER].  
The THX Audio Setup screen appears.  
Press the [SETUP] button.  
Setup closes.  
8
ENTER  
2-6.THX Audio Setup  
Surr Back Sp Spacing  
THX Subwoofer  
BGC  
1ft-4ft  
Yes  
Off  
ENTER  
Notes:  
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV  
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow  
buttons.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
• The Equalizer settings have no effect on 176.4/  
192 kHz input signals.  
buttons to select “Surr Back Sp  
Spacing,and use the Left and  
Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to specify  
the distance between your sur-  
round back speakers:  
ENTER  
THX Audio Setup  
< 1 ft (< 0.3 m) (Default): Select this if  
your surround back speakers are  
between 0 and 1 foot (0–30 cm) apart.  
These settings are not set automatically by the Auto-  
matic Speaker Setup function (see page 55).  
ENTER  
1–4 ft (0.3–1.2 m): Select this if your  
surround back speakers are between 1  
and 4 feet (0.3–1.2 m) apart.  
With the Surr Back Sp Spacing setting, you can specify  
the distance between your surround back speakers.  
If you’re using a THX-certified subwoofer, set the THX  
Subwoofer setting to Yes. You can then apply THX’s  
Boundary Gain Compensation (BGC) to compensate the  
perceived exaggeration of low frequencies for listeners  
sitting very close to a room boundary (i.e., wall).  
>4 ft (>1.2 m): Select this if your sur-  
round back speakers are more than 4  
feet (1.2 m) apart.  
Note:  
• This setting is only available if the  
Surr Back Ch setting in the Speaker  
Configuration is set to 2ch (page 87).  
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE  
MODE button, followed by the  
1
RECEIVER  
[SETUP] button.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Advanced Setup—Continued  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “THX Sub-  
woofer,and use the Left and  
Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to select:  
No: Select this if you do not have  
a THX-certified subwoofer.  
]
Press the [SETUP] button.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
5
2
3
ENTER  
Yes: Select this if you have a THX-  
certified subwoofer.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “4. Source  
]
Setup,and then press [ENTER].  
The Source Setup menu appears. The  
name of the currently selected input  
selector is displayed in a box.  
ENTER  
ENTER  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
4.Source Setup  
DVD  
1.IntelliVolume  
2.A/V Sync  
3.Name Edit  
4.Satellite Radio  
5.SIRIUS Parental Lock  
6
ENTER  
buttons to select “BGC,and use  
the Left and Right [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to select:  
ENTER  
Off: Select this to turn off BGC.  
On: Select this to turn on BGC.  
Note:  
• This setting is only available if THX  
Subwoofer is set to Yes (step 5).  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select an item, and  
then press [ENTER].  
]
4
5
ENTER  
ENTER  
The screen for that item appears.  
Press the [SETUP] button.  
The setup menu closes.  
7
ENTER  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select an option, and  
use the Left and Right [ ]/[  
buttons to change it.  
The Source Setup menu items are  
explained below.  
]
Note:  
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV  
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow  
buttons.  
]
ENTER  
Source Setup  
ENTER  
This section explains items on the Source Setup menu.  
Items can be set individually for each input selector.  
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE  
MODE button, and then use the  
1
RECEIVER  
input selector buttons to select  
an input source.  
DVD  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
3
1
GAME/TV  
4
2
AUX1  
5
AUX  
6
2
TAPE  
7
TUNER  
8
CD  
9
PHONO  
+10  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Advanced Setup—Continued  
Name Edit  
When you’ve finished, press the  
[SETUP] button.  
Setup closes.  
6
You can enter a custom name for each individual input  
selector and radio preset for easy identification. When  
selected, the custom name will appear on the display.  
Select the input selector to which  
1
you want to give a custom name.  
To name a radio preset, use the  
[TUNER] button to select AM or FM,  
and then select the preset.  
IntelliVolume  
With IntelliVolume, you can set the input level for each  
input selector individually. This is useful if one of your  
source components is louder or quieter than the others.  
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE  
MODE button, followed by the  
[SETUP] button.  
2
RECEIVER  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ] buttons to select an  
input selector, and use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to set the level.  
If a component is noticeably louder than the others, use  
the Left [ ] button to reduce its input level. If it’s  
noticeably quieter, use the Right [ ] button to increase  
its input level. The input level can be adjusted from  
–12 dB to +12 dB in 1 dB steps.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “4. Source  
Setup,and then press [ENTER].  
]
3
4
Note:  
• IntelliVolume does not apply for Zone 2 or Zone 3.  
ENTER  
The Source Setup menu appears.  
A/V Sync  
4.Source Setup  
DVD  
1.IntelliVolume  
2.A/V Sync  
3.Name Edit  
4.Satellite Radio  
5.SIRIUS Parental Lock  
When using your DVD player’s progressive scanning  
function, you may find that the picture and sound are out  
of sync. With the A/V Sync setting, you can correct this  
by applying a delay to the audio signal. The delay can be  
set from 0 to 250 milliseconds (msec) in 5 millisecond  
steps.  
ENTER  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[ ] buttons to select an  
input selector, and use the Left and Right [ ]/[ ] but-  
tons to set the delay.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
buttons to select “Name Edit,”  
and then press [ENTER].  
The Name Edit screen appears.  
To view the TV picture while setting the delay, press  
[ENTER]. Press [ENTER] again when you’ve finished.  
ENTER  
4-3.Name Edit  
DVD  
4-2.A/V Sync  
DVD  
A/V Sync  
(HDMI LipSync  
Display  
Name  
Default  
100msec  
60msec)  
[
]
ENTER  
Press Enter to see picture  
If HDMI Lip Sync is enabled (see page 99), and your TV  
or display supports HDMI Lip Sync, the displayed delay  
time will be the A/V Sync delay time. The HDMI Lip  
Sync delay time is displayed underneath in parentheses.  
If you’re naming an item for the very  
first time, go to step 6.  
If the item already has a name, you can  
select Default or Custom in step 5.  
Note:  
• A/V Sync cannot be set when the PureAudio listening  
mode is selected, or when the Direct listening mode is  
used with an analog input source.  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Advanced Setup—Continued  
Press the [SETUP] button.  
Setup closes.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “Display,and  
use the Left and Right [ ]/[  
buttons to select:  
Default: The default name is dis-  
played.  
]
9
5
ENTER  
]
Custom:The custom name is dis-  
played.  
ENTER  
Notes:  
• To store a name, you must select “OK” and press  
[ENTER] in step 7, otherwise it will not be saved.  
When Default is selected, the station’s  
frequency appears on the display when  
a radio preset is selected.  
You cannot enter a custom name for XM or SIRIUS  
radio presets.  
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV  
buttons.  
Press the Down [ ] button to  
select “Name,and then press  
[ENTER] to open the character  
input screen.  
6
7
ENTER  
Satellite Radio  
4-3.Name Edit  
This item is for use with satellite radio. It’s not available  
if Satellite Radio is set to None (see page 99). See the  
Name  
[
]
A B C D E F G H I J K L M  
ENTER  
Q
d
N O P  
R S T U V W X Y Z  
g
a
c
e
j
o m  
b
f
h i  
k
n o p q  
u v w x y z  
r s t  
SIRIUS Parental Lock  
This item is for use with SIRIUS Satellite Radio. It’s not  
available if Satellite Radio is set to None or XM (see  
page 99). See the separate Satellite Radio Guide for  
more information.  
Use the arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[  
]
buttons to select a character, and  
then press [ENTER].  
ENTER  
Repeat this step to enter up to 10  
characters.  
To correct a character:  
1. Use the arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[  
]
ENTER  
buttons to select the incorrect char-  
acter, and then press [ENTER]. The  
character input screen opens.  
2. Use the arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[  
]
buttons to select the correct charac-  
ter, and then press [ENTER].  
When you’ve finished, use the  
arrow [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ] buttons  
to display the following screen,  
select “OK,and then press  
[ENTER].  
8
ENTER  
4-3.Name Edit  
Name  
[
]
ENTER  
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - . ‘  
_
( ) +  
= / , : ; ! ?  
OK  
*
Cancel  
“OK”  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Advanced Setup—Continued  
Miscellaneous Setup  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
4
buttons to select an item, and  
use the Left and Right [ ]/[  
buttons to change it.  
This section explains items on the Miscellaneous menu.  
]
ENTER  
+10  
0
MA
The items are explained below.  
ZONE  
2
1
2
REMOTE MODE  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
CDR/MD  
TV  
CABLE  
SAT  
DOCK  
RECEIVER  
TAPE/AMP  
SLEEP  
RECEIVER  
DIMMER  
ENTER  
+
ENTER  
SETUP  
CH  
ENTER  
VOL  
DISC  
ALBUM  
-
PREV  
CH  
DISPLAY  
MUTING  
When you’ve finished, press the  
[SETUP] button.  
5
Setup closes.  
LIST  
RANDOM  
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE  
MODE button, followed by the  
[SETUP] button.  
1
Note:  
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV  
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow  
buttons.  
RECEIVER  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
Volume Setup  
Volume Display  
With this setting, you can choose how the volume level  
is displayed.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select  
“6. Miscellaneous,and then  
press [ENTER].  
]
2
3
Absolute: Display range is Min, 0.5 through 99.5,  
Max.  
Relative: Display range is –dB, –81.5 dB,  
–81.0 dB through +18.0 dB.  
The absolute value 82 is equivalent to the relative value  
0 dB.  
ENTER  
The Miscellaneous menu appears.  
6.Miscellaneous  
1.Volume Setup  
2.OSD Setup  
ENTER  
Muting Level  
This setting determines how much the output is muted  
when the Muting function is used (see page 68). It can be  
set to –dB (fully muted) or from –50 dB to –10 dB in  
10 dB steps.  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select an item, and  
then press [ENTER].  
]
ENTER  
Maximum Volume  
The screen for that item appears.  
With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume.  
When the Volume Display setting is set to Absolute, the  
Maximum Volume range is Off, 99 to 50. When it’s set  
to Relative, the range is Off, +17 dB to –32 dB. To dis-  
able this setting, select Off.  
ENTER  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Advanced Setup—Continued  
Power On Volume  
This setting determines what the volume will be each  
OSD Setup  
time the AV receiver is turned on.  
Immediate Display  
This setting determines whether operation details are  
displayed onscreen immediately after an AV receiver  
function is used.  
When the Volume Display preference is set to Absolute,  
the range is Last, Min, 1 to Max. When it’s set to Rela-  
tive, the range is Last, –dB, –81 dB to +18 dB.  
On: Displayed (default).  
Off: Not displayed.  
To use the same volume level as when the AV receiver  
was last turned off, select Last.  
Even if On is selected, operation details are not output if  
the input source is connected to a COMPONENT  
VIDEO IN or HDMI IN.  
Note:  
• The Power On Volume setting cannot be set higher  
than the Maximum Volume setting.  
For optimal video performance, THX recommends that  
Immediate Display be turned off.  
Headphone Level  
With this setting, you can offset the headphone volume  
relative to the main volume. This is useful if your head-  
phones are too loud or too quiet at the volume setting you  
usually use when listening through your speakers. The  
headphone level can be set from –12 dB to +12 dB.  
Monitor Type  
With this setting, you can specify the aspect ratio of your  
TV so that menus are displayed properly.  
4:3: Select if your TV is 4:3 (default).  
16:9: Select if your TV is 16:9.  
Zone2 Maximum Volume  
With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume for  
Zone 2.  
Display Position  
This setting determines where on the screen operation  
When the Volume Display setting is set to Absolute, the  
Maximum Volume range is Off, 99 to 50. When it’s set  
to Relative, the range is Off, +17 dB to –32 dB. To dis-  
able this setting, select Off.  
Bottom: Bottom of the screen (default).  
Top: Top of the screen.  
TV Format  
See “TV Format Setup (not NorthAmerican models)” on  
page 60.  
Zone2 Power On Volume  
This setting determines what the volume will be for  
Zone 2 each time the AV receiver is turned on.  
Language (TX-SR875 only)  
When the Volume Display preference is set to Absolute,  
the range is Last, Min, 1 to Max. When it’s set to Rela-  
tive, the range is Last, –dB, –81 dB to +18 dB.  
This setting determines the language used for the  
onscreen setup menus.You can select: English, German,  
French, Spanish, Italian, Dutch, Swedish, or Japanese.  
To use the same volume level as when the AV receiver  
was last turned off, select Last.  
Zone3 Maximum Volume  
With this setting, you can limit the maximum volume for  
Zone 3.  
When the Volume Display setting is set to Absolute, the  
Maximum Volume range is Off, 99 to 50. When it’s set  
to Relative, the range is Off, +17 dB to –32 dB. To dis-  
able this setting, select Off.  
Zone3 Power On Volume  
This setting determines what the volume will be for  
Zone 3 each time the AV receiver is turned on.  
When the Volume Display preference is set to Absolute,  
the range is Last, Min, 1 to Max. When it’s set to Rela-  
tive, the range is Last, –dB, –81 dB to +18 dB.  
To use the same volume level as when the AV receiver  
was last turned off, select Last.  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Advanced Setup—Continued  
Hardware Setup  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
4
5
buttons to select an item, and  
use the Left and Right [ ]/[  
buttons to change it.  
This section explains items on the Hardware menu.  
]
ENTER  
The items are explained below.  
Remote  
indicator  
ON  
STANDBY  
TV  
INPUT  
INPUT  
DVD  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
3
When you’ve finished, press the  
[SETUP] button.  
Number  
buttons  
+
TV CH  
-
1
GAME/TV  
4
2
AUX1  
5
AUX  
6
2
TAPE  
7
TUNER  
8
CD  
9
Setup closes.  
TV VOL  
PHONO  
D. TUN  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
CLEAR  
0
11  
12  
INPUT SELECTOR  
MACRO  
ZONE  
ZONE  
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
Note:  
CDR/MD  
TV  
CABLE  
SAT  
DOCK  
RECEIVER  
TAPE/AMP  
SLEEP  
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV  
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow  
buttons.  
RECEIVER  
DIMMER  
+
ENTER  
SETUP  
CH  
ENTER  
VOL  
DISC  
ALBUM  
Remote Control  
-
PREV  
CH  
Remote ID  
DISPLAY  
MUTING  
When several Onkyo components are used in the same  
room, their remote ID codes may overlap. To differenti-  
ate the AV receiver from the other components, you can  
change its remote ID from 1, the default, to 2 or 3.  
YLIST  
RANDOM  
Note:  
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE  
MODE button, followed by the  
[SETUP] button.  
• If you do change the AV receiver’s remote ID, be sure  
to change the remote controller to the same ID (see  
below), otherwise, you won’t be able to control it with  
the remote controller.  
1
RECEIVER  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
Changing the Remote Controller’s ID  
While holding down the  
[RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE but-  
ton, press the TV [INPUT] button.  
1
RECEIVER  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
The Remote indicator flashes four  
times.  
2
3
buttons to select “7. Hardware  
Setup,and then press [ENTER].  
The Hardware Setup menu appears.  
ENTER  
7.Hardware Setup  
1.Remote Control  
2.Zone2/Zone3  
3.Tuner  
4.Analog Multich  
5.HDMI  
Use the number buttons to enter  
ID 1, 2, or 3.  
The Remote indicator flashes twice.  
2
ENTER  
DVD  
1
VCR/DVR  
2
CBL/SAT  
3
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select an item, and  
then press [ENTER].  
]
ENTER  
The screen for that item appears.  
Zone 2 and Zone 3  
See “Zone 2 and Zone 3” on page 101.  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Advanced Setup—Continued  
Lip Sync  
Tuner  
The Lip Sync function can automatically synchronize  
HDMI audio and video that’s gotten out of sync due to  
the complex digital video processing being performed by  
your HDMI-compatible TV. With HDMI Lip Sync, the  
audio delay required to synchronize the audio and video  
is calculated and applied automatically by the AV  
receiver.  
AM Freq Step (on some models)  
See “AM Frequency Step Setup (on some models)” on  
page 61.  
Satellite Radio (on North American model)  
If you connect an XM Satellite Radio antenna or SIRIUS  
Satellite Radio antenna to the AV receiver (both sold sep-  
arately), set this setting to XM or SIRIUS respectively. If  
you connect both types of antenna, select XM/SIRIUS.  
Otherwise, select None. See the separate Satellite Radio  
Guide for more information.  
Disable: HDMI lip sync disabled.  
Enable: HDMI lip sync enabled.  
Notes:  
• This function works only if your HDMI-compatible  
TV supports HDMI Lip Sync.  
Analog Multich  
You can check the amount of delay being applied by  
the HDMI Lip Sync function on the A/V Sync screen  
(see page 94).  
Subwoofer Input Sensitivity  
Some DVD players output the LFE channel from their  
analog subwoofer output at 15 dB higher than normal.  
With this setting, you can change the AV receiver’s sub-  
woofer sensitivity to match your DVD player. Note that  
this setting only affects signals connected to the AV  
receiver’s MULTI CH SUBWOOFER jack.  
xvYCC  
If your HDMI source and HDMI-compatible TV both  
support the xvYCC color standard, you can enable  
xvYCC color on the AV receiver with this setting.  
Disable: xvYCC color disabled.  
Enable: xvYCC color enabled.  
You can select 0 dB, 5 dB, 10 dB, or 15 dB.  
If you find that your subwoofer is too loud, try the 10 dB  
or 15 dB setting.  
Control  
This function allows CEC-compatible components or  
RIHD-compatible components connected via HDMI to  
be controlled with the AV receiver.  
HDMI  
Disable: HDMI Control disabled.  
Enable: HDMI Control enabled.  
HDMI Audio  
This setting determines whether audio received by an  
HDMI input is output by the HDMI OUT.You may want  
to change this setting to On if your TV is connected to  
the HDMI OUT and you want to listen to audio from an  
HDMI component through your TV’s speakers. Nor-  
mally, it should be set to Off.  
Notes:  
• Select Disable if a connected component is incompat-  
• If operation is unreliable when set to Enable, select  
Disable instead.  
• When the HDMI Audio setting is set to On, or TV  
Control is set to Enable and you’re listening through  
your TV’s speakers (see page 37), if you turn up the  
AV receiver’s volume control, the sound will be output  
by the AV receiver’s speakers. To stop the AV  
receiver’s speakers producing sound, change the set-  
tings, change your TV’s settings, or turn down the AV  
receiver’s volume.  
Off: HDMI audio is not output (default).  
On: HDMI audio is output.  
Notes:  
• If On is selected and the signal can be output by the  
TV, the AV receiver will output no sound through its  
speakers.  
• When TV Control is enabled, this setting is set to  
Auto.  
Power Control  
• With some TVs and input signals, no sound may be  
output even if On is selected.  
To link the power functions of CEC-compatible compo-  
nents or RIHD-compatible components connected via  
HDMI, select Enable.  
• When the HDMI Audio setting is set to On, or TV  
Control is set to Enable and you’re listening through  
your TV’s speakers (see page 37), if you turn up the  
AV receiver’s volume control, the sound will be output  
by the AV receiver’s speakers. To stop the AV  
receiver’s speakers producing sound, change the set-  
tings, change your TV’s settings, or turn down the AV  
receiver’s volume.  
Disable: Power Control disabled.  
Enable: Power Control enabled.  
Notes:  
• The Power Control setting can be set only when the  
above Control setting is set to Enable.  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Advanced Setup—Continued  
• HDMI power control only works with HDMI-compat-  
ible components that support it and may not work  
properly with some components due to their settings  
or compatibility.  
• When set to Enable, the AV receiver consumes more  
power.  
• When set to Enable, the AV receiver enters Ready  
mode when set to Standby, and the READY indicator  
lights up instead of the STANDBY indicator (not  
North American model).  
TV Control  
Select Enable to control the AV receiver from an RIHD-  
compatible TV connected via HDMI.  
Disable: TV Control disabled.  
Enable: TV Control enabled.  
Notes:  
• Select Disable if your TV is incompatible or you’re  
note sure about its compatibility.  
• The TV Control setting can be set only when the above  
Control and Power Control settings are both set to  
Enable.  
Note:  
• After changing the Control, Power Control, or TV  
Control setting, be sure to turn all of your compo-  
nents off and then back on again. Refer to the  
instruction manuals for your other components.  
Lock Setup  
Lock  
With this setting, you can protect your settings by lock-  
ing the setup menus.  
Locked: Setup menus locked.  
Unlocked: Setup menus unlocked.  
When Locked is selected, only this Lock Setup item can  
be accessed.  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Zone 2 and Zone 3  
In addition to your main listening room, you can also enjoy playback in two other rooms, or as we call them, Zone 2  
and Zone 3. And, you can select a different source for each room.  
ConnectingYour Zone 2 Speakers to an  
Amp in Zone 2  
Connecting Zone 2  
There are two ways you can connect Zone 2 speakers:  
This setup allows 7.1-channel playback in your main lis-  
1. Connect them directly to the AV receiver.  
tening room and 2-channel stereo playback in Zone 2,  
2. Connect them to an amp in Zone 2.  
with a different source in each room.  
Hookup  
ConnectingYour Zone 2 Speakers Directly  
• Use an RCA audio cable to connect the AV receiver’s  
ZONE 2 PRE OUT L/R jacks to an analog audio input  
to the AV receiver  
This setup allows 5.1-channel playback in your main  
room and 2-channel stereo playback in Zone 2, with a  
different source in each room. This is called Powered  
Zone 2, as the Zone 2 speakers are powered by the AV  
receiver. Note that when Powered Zone 2 is turned off,  
you can enjoy 7.1-channel playback in your main room.  
on your Zone 2 amp.  
• Connect your Zone 2 speakers to the speaker termi-  
nals on your Zone 2 amp.  
Main room  
Hookup  
TV  
• Connect your Zone 2 speakers to the AV receiver’s  
ZONE 2 L/R speaker terminals.  
Main room  
AV receiver  
TV  
ZONE 2 ZONE 3  
L
R
PRE OUT  
AV receiver  
Zone 2  
ZONE2 R  
ZONE2 L  
IN  
R
L
Receiver/  
integrated amp  
Zone 2  
R
L
Note:  
• With the default settings, the Zone 2 volume must be  
set on the Zone 2 amp. If your Zone 2 amp has no vol-  
ume control, set the Zone 2 Out setting to Variable so  
that you can set the Zone 2 volume on the AV receiver  
(see page 104).  
You must set the Powered Zone 2 setting to Act  
(Activated) to use this setup (see page 103).  
Notes:  
• With this setup, the Zone 2 volume is controlled by the  
AV receiver.  
• On the TX-SR875, Powered Zone 2 cannot be used if  
the Speaker Type is set to Bi-Amp or BTL (page 45).  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued  
Zone 2 Video Output (TX-SR875 only)  
Connecting Zone 3  
The TX-SR875 features a composite video output for  
connection to a TV in Zone 2, so you can enjoy both  
audio and video in that zone.  
Zone 3 speakers must be connected to an amp in Zone 3.  
ConnectingYour Zone 3 Speakers  
Hookup  
You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback in Zone 3 and  
a different source to those selected for your main room  
and Zone 2.  
• Use a composite video cable to connect the AV  
receiver’s ZONE 2 OUT V jack to a composite video  
input on your Zone 2 TV.  
Hookup  
Main room  
• Use an RCA audio cable to connect the AV receiver’s  
ZONE 3 PRE OUT L/R jacks to an analog audio input  
on your Zone 3 amp.  
TV  
• Connect your Zone 3 speakers to the speaker termi-  
nals on your Zone 3 amp.  
Main room  
AV receiver  
ZONE 2  
OUT  
TV  
Zone 2  
AV receiver  
TV  
ZONE 2 ZONE 3  
L
R
Note:  
PRE OUT  
• The ZONE 2 OUT V jack outputs video from compo-  
nents connected to composite video inputs and  
S-Video inputs.  
Zone 3  
IN  
R
L
Zone 2 12V Trigger  
Receiver/  
integrated amp  
When Zone 2 is turned on, the output from the ZONE 2  
12V TRIGGER OUT goes high (+12 volts, 100 milliam-  
peres max). Connecting this jack to a 12-volt trigger  
input on a component in Zone 2 will make that compo-  
nent turn on or off as and when Zone 2 is turned on or off  
on the AV receiver.  
Note:  
• With the default settings, the Zone 3 volume must be  
set on the Zone 3 amp. If your Zone 3 amp has no vol-  
ume control, set the Zone 3 Out setting to Variable so  
that you can set the Zone 3 volume on the AV receiver  
(see page 104).  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued  
Powered Zone 2 Setting  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “2. Zone 2/  
Zone 3,and then press [ENTER].  
]
3
4
If you’ve connected your Zone 2 speakers to the AV  
receiver, as explained in “Connecting Your Zone 2  
Speakers Directly to the AV receiver” on page 101, you  
must set the Powered Zone 2 setting to Act (Activated).  
ENTER  
The Zone 2/Zone 3 screen appears.  
7-2.Zone2/Zone3  
Powered Zone2  
Zone2 Out  
Not Act  
Fixed  
Zone3 Out  
Fixed  
ENTER  
ON  
STANDBY  
TV  
INPUT  
DVD  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
3
+
TV CH  
-
1
GAME/TV  
4
2
AUX1  
5
AUX  
6
2
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “Powered  
Zone 2,and use the Left and  
Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to select:  
NotAct: ZONE 2 L/R speaker termi-  
nals not activated (Powered  
Zone 2 disabled).  
]
TAPE  
7
TUNER  
8
CD  
9
TV VOL  
PHONO  
D. TUN  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
CLEAR  
0
11  
12  
ENTER  
INPUT SELECTOR  
MACRO  
ZONE  
ZONE  
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
CDR/MD  
TV  
CABLE  
SAT  
DOCK  
RECEIVER  
TAPE/AMP  
SLEEP  
RECEIVER  
DIMMER  
Act: ZONE 2 L/R speaker termi-  
nals activated (Powered Zone  
2 enabled).  
+
ENTER  
ENTER  
SETUP  
CH  
ENTER  
VOL  
DISC  
ALBUM  
-
PREV  
CH  
DISPLAY  
MUTING  
Press the [SETUP] button.  
Setup closes.  
5
LIST  
RANDOM  
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE  
MODE button, followed by the  
[SETUP] button.  
1
Notes:  
RECEIVER  
• WhenAct is selected and Zone 2 turned on, the Zone 2  
speakers connected to the ZONE 2 L/R speaker termi-  
nals output sound, but the surround back speakers con-  
nected to the SURR BACK L/R speaker terminals do  
not. When Act is selected and Zone 2 turned off, the  
surround back speakers output sound as normal.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
• On the TX-SR875, Powered Zone 2 cannot be used if  
the Speaker Type is set to Bi-Amp or BTL (page 45).  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
2
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV  
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow  
buttons.  
buttons to select “7. Hardware  
Setup,and then press [ENTER].  
The Hardware Setup menu appears.  
ENTER  
ENTER  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued  
Zone 2/Zone 3 Out Settings  
Press the [SETUP] button.  
Setup closes.  
5
If you’ve connected your Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers to  
an amp with no volume control, set the Zone 2 Out or  
Zone 3 Out setting, respectively, to Variable so that you  
can set the zone’s volume, balance, and tone on the AV  
receiver.  
Note:  
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE  
• This procedure can also be performed on the AV  
receiver by using its [SETUP], [ENTER], and arrow  
buttons.  
1
MODE button, followed by the  
[SETUP] button.  
The main menu appears onscreen.  
RECEIVER  
Using Zone 2 and Zone 3  
This section explains how to use Zone 2 and Zone 3.  
ZONE3  
ZONE2  
TONE  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
2
3
4
MASTER VOLUME  
buttons to select “7. Hardware  
Setup,and then press [ENTER].  
The Hardware Setup menu appears.  
STANDBY/ON  
ENTER  
STANDBY  
READY  
ZONE  
ZONE  
2
3
PURE AUDIO  
AUDIO SEL  
DVD  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
GAME/TV  
AUX  
1
AUX  
2
TAPE  
TUNER  
CD  
PHONO  
DISPLAY  
PUSH TO OPEN  
TUNING  
PRESET  
RETURN  
ZONE  
ZONE  
2
3
OFF  
LEVEL  
TONE  
HDMI OUT  
STEREO  
THX  
SETUP MIC  
AUX  
2
L
INPUT  
TUNING  
PHONES  
POWER  
RT/PTY/TP MEMORY MODE  
SETUP  
CLEAR  
ON  
OFF  
DIGITAL INPUT  
LISTENING MODE  
S
VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
R
DIGITAL  
ENTER  
TUNING  
ENTER  
OFF  
,
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
buttons to select “2. Zone 2/  
]
STANDBY  
ON  
ON  
STANDBY  
TV  
Zone 3,and then press [ENTER].  
The Zone 2/Zone 3 screen appears.  
INPUT  
ENTER  
DVD  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
3
+
TV CH  
-
1
GAME/TV  
4
2
AUX1  
5
AUX  
6
2
INPUT  
SELECTOR  
7-2.Zone2/Zone3  
TAPE  
7
TUNER  
8
CD  
9
Powered Zone2  
Zone2 Out  
Not Act  
Fixed  
TV VOL  
PHONO  
D. TUN  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
CLEAR  
12  
0
Zone3 Out  
Fixed  
11  
ENTER  
INPUT SELECTOR  
MACRO  
ZONE  
ZONE  
3
2
1
2
3
ZONE3  
ZONE2  
REMOTE MODE  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
CDR/MD  
TV  
CABLE  
SAT  
DOCK  
RECEIVER  
TAPE/AMP  
SLEEP  
DIMMER  
Use the Up and Down [ ]/[  
]
buttons to selectZone 2 Outor  
“Zone 3 Out,and use the Left  
and Right [ ]/[ ] buttons to  
select:  
Fixed: The Zone 2 or Zone 3 volume  
must be set on the amp in that  
zone.  
+
CH  
ENTER  
VOL  
DISC  
ALBUM  
ENTER  
-
PREV  
CH  
MUTING  
DISPLAY  
MUTING  
REC  
PLAYLIST  
RANDOM  
Variable: The Zone 2 or Zone 3 vol-  
ume can be set on the AV  
receiver.  
ENTER  
LISTENING MODE  
SURR  
STEREO  
REPEAT  
AUDIO  
DIRECT  
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE  
PURE  
A
THX  
ALL ST  
-
+
LEVEL  
TEST TONE  
CH SEL  
LEVEL  
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF  
LEVEL–,  
LEVEL+  
AUDIO SEL  
VCR  
L
NIGHT  
Re-EQ  
HDD  
DVD  
RC-690  
M
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued  
• On the North American model, you can select a differ-  
ent radio source for each room. For example, XM for  
your main room, SIRIUS for Zone 2, and AM/FM for  
Zone 3.  
Selecting an Input Source for Zones  
On the remote controller, press  
the [ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3]  
REMOTE MODE button.  
1
Remote  
controller  
ZONE  
3
2
Turning Off Zones  
On the AV receiver, press the  
[ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button.  
ZONE  
On the remote controller, press  
the [ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3]  
REMOTE MODE button.  
1
AV receiver  
The ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 indicator  
flashes, and the input selector currently  
selected for the zone appears on the dis-  
play.  
Remote  
controller  
ZONE 2  
ZONE  
3
2
On the AV receiver, press the  
[ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button.  
ZONE  
ZONE 3  
AV receiver  
The ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 indicator  
flashes.  
On the remote controller, use the  
INPUT SELECTOR buttons.  
ZONE 2  
2
Remote  
controller  
DVD  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
1
GAME/TV  
4
2
AUX1  
5
3
AUX  
6
ZONE 3  
On the AV receiver, use the input  
selector buttons, or press the  
[ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button  
repeatedly  
2
TAPE  
7
TUNER  
8
CD  
9
On the remote controller, press  
the [STANDBY] button.  
2
PHONO  
+10  
Remote  
The input source is selected, the zone is  
turned on, the name of the input selec-  
tor appears on the display, and the  
ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 indicator lights  
continuously.  
controller  
STANDBY  
On the AV receiver, press the  
[OFF] button.  
AV receiver  
ZONE 2  
The zone is turned off, and the ZONE 2  
or ZONE 3 indicator goes off.  
AV receiver  
OFF  
ZONE 3  
Notes:  
• To select AM or FM, press the [TUNER] input selec-  
tor button repeatedly. On the North American model,  
you can also select XM or SIRIUS.  
Note:  
• When Zone 2 is turned off, the output from the  
ZONE 2 12V TRIGGER OUT goes low (0 volts).  
• Only analog input sources are output by Zone 2 and  
Zone 3. Digital input sources are not output. If no  
sound is heard when an input source is selected, check  
to make sure it’s connected to an analog input.  
• While Powered Zone 2 is being used, listening modes  
that require surround back speakers (6.1/7.1), such as  
Dolby Digital EX, DTS-ES, and THX Ultra2 Cinema,  
are unavailable.  
• When Zone 2 is turned on, the output from the  
ZONE 2 12V TRIGGER OUT goes high (+12 volts).  
• While Zone 2 or Zone 3 is on, the Auto Power On/  
Standby and Direct Change  
work.  
functions do not  
You cannot select different AM or FM radio stations  
for your main room, Zone 2, and Zone 3. The same  
AM/FM radio station will be heard in each room.  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued  
Adjusting the Volume of Zones  
Muting Zones  
Remote  
controller  
On the remote controller, press  
the [ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3]  
REMOTE MODE button, and then  
use the [LEVEL–] and [LEVEL+]  
buttons.  
On the remote controller, press  
the [ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3]  
REMOTE MODE button, and then  
press the [MUTING] button.  
ZONE  
3
2
ZONE  
3
ZONE  
ZONE  
2
To unmute a zone, on the remote  
controller, press the [ZONE 2] or  
[ZONE 3] REMOTE MODE button,  
and then press the [MUTING] but-  
ton again.  
LEVEL  
LEVEL  
On the AV receiver, press the  
[ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button,  
press the [LEVEL] button, and  
then use the Up [ ] and Down  
MUTING  
AV receiver  
[
] buttons.  
Adjusting the Tone of Zone 2  
On the AV receiver, press the  
[ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button.  
1
AV receiver  
ZONE 2  
Adjusting the Balance of Zones  
On the AV receiver, press the  
[ZONE 2] or [ZONE 3] button.  
1
ZONE 3  
TONE  
AV receiver  
ZONE 2  
Press the AV receiver’s [TONE]  
button repeatedly to select Bass  
or Treble.  
2
3
ZONE 3  
TONE  
Use the Up [ ] and Down [  
]
Press the AV receiver’s [TONE]  
button repeatedly to select Bal-  
ance.  
2
3
buttons to adjust the bass or tre-  
ble.  
You can boost or cut the Bass or Treble  
from –10 dB to +10 dB in 1 dB steps.  
Use the Up [ ] and Down [  
]
buttons to adjust the balance.  
You can adjust the balance from 0 in the  
center to +10 dB to the right or +10 dB  
to the left in 2 dB steps.  
Notes:  
• Zones can also be unmuted by adjusting the volume.  
• The tone cannot be adjusted for Zone 3.  
• The Zone 2 level, balance, and tone functions have no  
effect on the ZONE 2 PRE OUT when the Zone 2 Out  
setting is set to Fixed (page 104).  
• The Zone 3 level and balance functions have no effect  
on the ZONE 3 PRE OUT when the Zone 3 Out set-  
ting is set to Fixed (page 104).  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Zone 2 and Zone 3—Continued  
Using a Multiroom Kit with a Cabinet  
Using the Remote Controller in  
In this setup, the IR receiver picks up the infrared signals  
from the remote controller and feeds them to the AV  
receiver located in the cabinet via the connecting block.  
Zone 2/3 and Multiroom Control Kits  
To control the AV receiver with the remote controller  
while you’re in Zone 2 or Zone 3, you’ll need a commer-  
cially available multiroom remote control kit for each  
zone.  
• Multiroom kits are made by Niles and Xantech.  
IR Receiver  
Connecting  
block  
These kits can also be used when there isn’t a clear line  
of sight to the AV receiver’s remote sensor, such as when  
it’s installed inside a cabinet.  
IR IN  
Using a Multiroom Kit with Zone 2/3  
In this setup, the IR receiver in Zone 2/3 picks up the  
infrared signals from the remote controller and feeds  
them through to the AV receiver in the main room via the  
connecting block.  
Inside  
cabinet  
Remote controller  
Signal flow  
Using a Multiroom Kit with Other  
Components  
IR Receiver  
Connecting  
In this setup, an IR emitter is connected to the AV  
receiver’s IR OUT jack and placed in front of the other  
component’s remote control sensor. Infrared signals  
received at the AV receiver’s IR IN jack are fed through  
to the other component via the IR emitter. Signals picked  
up by the AV receiver’s remote control sensor are not  
output.  
block  
Remote controller  
Main room  
Zone 2/3  
IR Receiver  
Connecting  
Signal flow  
block  
The miniplug cable from the connecting block should be  
connected to the AV receiver’s IR IN jack, as shown  
below.  
IR IN  
AV receiver  
IR OUT  
IR Emitter  
From the connecting block  
Remote controller  
Other component  
Miniplug cable  
IR  
IN  
Signal flow  
The IR emitter should be connected to the AV receiver’s  
IR OUT jack, as shown below.  
OUT  
AV receiver  
Miniplug cable  
Other component  
Remote control  
sensor  
Emitter  
IR  
IN  
Miniplug  
IR Emitter  
OUT  
AV receiver  
Signal flow  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Controlling Other Components  
You can control your other components, including those  
This section explains how to:  
• Enter the remote control code for a component that  
you want to control: DVD, TV, VCR, etc.  
While holding down the REMOTE  
MODE button to which you want  
to enter the code, press the  
[STANDBY] button.  
2
REMOTE MODE  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
TV  
CDR/MD  
The Remote indicator lights up.  
CABLE  
SAT  
• Learn commands directly from another component’s  
remote controller (see page 111).  
• Program the MACRO buttons to perform a sequence  
of up to eight remote control actions (see page 112).  
STANDBY  
Entering Remote Control Codes  
To control another component, you must first enter that  
component’s remote control code to a REMOTE MODE  
button. You’ll need to enter a code for each component  
that you want to control.  
Within 30 seconds, use the num-  
ber buttons to enter the 4-digit  
remote control code.  
3
DVD  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
1
GAME/TV  
4
2
AUX1  
5
3
AUX  
6
2
The Remote indicator flashes twice.  
TAPE  
7
TUNER  
8
CD  
9
Remote  
indicator  
STANDBY  
0
ON  
STANDBY  
TV  
INPUT  
TV  
I
DVD  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
3
+
TV CH  
-
1
GAME/TV  
4
2
AUX1  
5
AUX  
6
2
Number  
buttons  
TAPE  
7
TUNER  
8
CD  
9
Press the REMOTE MODE button  
again to select the remote con-  
troller mode, point the remote  
controller at the component, and  
check the operation.  
If the remote controller doesn’t work as  
expected, and several remote codes are  
listed, try each one in turn and use the  
one that works best.  
4
TV VOL  
PHONO  
D. TUN  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
INPUT SELECTOR  
MACRO  
CLEAR  
0
11  
12  
ZONE  
ZONE  
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
REMOTE  
MODE  
CDR/MD  
TV  
CABLE  
SAT  
DOCK  
RECEIVER  
TAPE/AMP  
SLEEP  
RECEIVER  
DIMMER  
+
CH  
ENTER  
VOL  
DISC  
ALBUM  
-
Notes:  
PREV  
CH  
• Remote control codes cannot be entered for the  
[RECEIVER] and [DOCK] REMOTE MODE but-  
tons.  
DISPLAY  
MUTING  
REC  
PLAYLIST  
RANDOM  
• The remote control codes provided are correct at the  
time of printing but subject to change.  
LISTENING MODE  
SURR  
STEREO  
REPEAT  
AUDIO  
DIRECT  
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE  
PURE  
A
THX  
ALL ST  
• The DOCK remote mode can only be used with  
the Onkyo RI Dock at this time.  
-
+
LEVEL  
TEST TONE  
CH SEL  
LEVEL  
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF  
AUDIO SEL  
VCR  
L
NIGHT  
Re-EQ  
HDD  
DVD  
• The [DVD] and [CD] REMOTE MODE buttons  
are preprogrammed for use with Onkyo DVD  
players and CD players, respectively.  
RC-690  
M
• To control another manufacturer’s CD recorder or  
MD recorder, enter the appropriate remote control  
code to the [CD] REMOTE MODE button.  
Look up the component’s remote  
control code in the separate  
Remote Control Codes list.  
1
The codes are organized by category.  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Controlling Other Components—Continued  
Remote Control Codes for Onkyo  
Components Connected via  
Resetting the REMOTE MODE Buttons  
You can reset a REMOTE MODE button to its default  
remote control code.  
Onkyo components that are connected via  
are con-  
trolled by pointing the remote controller at the AV  
receiver, not the component. This allows you to control  
components that are out of view, in a rack, for example.  
While holding down the REMOTE  
MODE button that you want to  
1
REMOTE MODE  
reset, press the TV [  
] button.  
DVD  
VCR  
The Remote indicator flashes three  
times.  
Make sure the Onkyo component is con-  
CD  
TV  
1
CDR/MD  
nected with an  
cable and an analog  
CABLE  
SAT  
audio cable (RCA).  
See page 43 for details.  
Enter the appropriate remote control code  
to the REMOTE MODE button.  
2
• [DVD] REMOTE MODE button  
Press the REMOTE MODE button  
again.  
5002: Onkyo DVD player with  
2
REMOTE MODE  
• [CD] REMOTE MODE button  
The Remote indicator flashes twice,  
indicating that the button has been  
reset.  
DVD  
VCR  
6002: Onkyo CD player with  
CD  
TV  
CDR/MD  
CABLE  
SAT  
• [MD] REMOTE MODE button  
6008: Onkyo MD recorder with  
The [DVD] and [CD] REMOTE  
MODE buttons are preprogrammed  
with remote control codes for control-  
ling Onkyo DVD players and CD play-  
ers, respectively. When these buttons  
are reset, the preprogrammed codes are  
restored.  
• [CDR] REMOTE MODE button  
6006: Onkyo CD recorder with  
See the previous page for how to enter remote  
control codes.  
Press the REMOTE MODE button, point  
the remote controller at the AV receiver,  
and operate the component.  
3
Resetting the Remote Controller  
If you want to control an Onkyo component by pointing  
the remote controller directly at it, or you want to control  
You can reset the remote controller to its default settings.  
an Onkyo component that’s not connected via  
the following remote control codes:  
• [DVD] REMOTE MODE button  
, use  
While holding down the  
[RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE but-  
ton, press the [STANDBY] button.  
1
RECEIVER  
5001: Onkyo DVD player without  
(default)  
The Remote indicator flashes five  
times.  
• [CD] REMOTE MODE button  
STANDBY  
6001: Onkyo CD player without  
(default)  
• [MD] REMOTE MODE button  
6007: Onkyo MD recorder without  
Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE  
MODE button again.  
The Remote indicator flashes twice,  
2
• [CDR] REMOTE MODE button  
6005: Onkyo CD recorder without  
RECEIVER  
indicating that the remote controller  
has been reset.  
Note:  
• If you connect an  
-capable Onkyo MiniDisc or CD  
recorder to the TAPE IN/OUT jacks, for remote oper-  
ation to work properly, you must set the Input Display  
to MD or CDR, respectively (see page 51).  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Controlling Other Components—Continued  
To control another component, point the remote controller at it and use the buttons explained below. (You must select  
the appropriate remote controller mode with the REMOTE MODE buttons first.)With some components, certain buttons  
may not work as expected, and some may not work at all.  
Controlling a TV  
Controlling a VCR  
Controlling a Satellite or  
Cable Receiver  
Press [VCR] first  
Press [CABLE] (SAT) first  
Press [TV] first  
ON  
STANDBY  
ON  
STANDBY  
ON  
STANDBY  
TV  
A
2
TV  
TV  
INPUT  
INPUT  
A
2
INPUT  
5
3
A
2
DVD  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
3
DVD  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
3
DVD  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
3
1
GAME/TV  
4
2
AUX1  
5
+
TV CH  
-
1
GAME/TV  
4
2
AUX1  
5
+
TV CH  
-
1
GAME/TV  
4
2
AUX1  
5
+
TV CH  
-
AUX  
6
2
AUX  
6
2
AUX  
6
2
TAPE  
7
TUNER  
8
CD  
9
TAPE  
7
TUNER  
8
CD  
9
TAPE  
7
TUNER  
8
CD  
9
TV VOL  
PHONO  
D. TUN  
TV VOL  
TV VOL  
PHONO  
D. TUN  
PHONO  
+10  
/
D. TUN  
6
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
CLEAR  
0
+10  
CLEAR  
CLEAR  
0
0
11  
12  
11  
12  
11  
12  
--  
/
--- 10  
-- --- 10  
INPUT SELECTOR  
MACRO  
INPUT SELECTOR  
INPUT SELECTOR  
MACRO  
MACRO  
3
3
ZONE  
3
2
1
2
3
ZONE  
3
2
ZONE  
3
2
1
2
3
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE  
REMOTE MODE  
REMOTE MODE  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
ZONE  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
ZONE  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
ZONE  
CDR/MD  
CDR/MD  
CDR/MD  
TV  
CABLE  
SAT  
DOCK  
RECEIVER  
TAPE/AMP  
SLEEP  
TV  
CABLE  
SAT  
DOCK  
RECEIVER  
TAPE/AMP  
SLEEP  
TV  
CABLE  
SAT  
DOCK  
RECEIVER  
TAPE/AMP  
SLEEP  
DIMMER  
DIMMER  
DIMMER  
8
8
3
8
9
8
4
9
4
+
+
+
CH  
CH  
CH  
ENTER  
VOL  
DISC  
ALBUM  
ENTER  
VOL  
ENTER  
VOL  
DISC  
ALBUM  
DISC  
ALBUM  
-
-
-
8
7
PREV  
CH  
8
6
9
9
PREV  
CH  
PREV  
CH  
4
8
DISPLAY  
MUTING  
5
8
5
6
DISPLAY  
MUTING  
DISPLAY  
MUTING  
REC  
PLAYLIST  
RANDOM  
8
REC  
PLAYLIST  
RANDOM  
REC  
PLAYLIST  
RANDOM  
7
LISTENING MODE  
SURR  
LISTENING MODE  
SURR  
LISTENING MODE  
SURR  
STEREO  
STEREO  
STEREO  
REPEAT  
AUDIO  
DIRECT  
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE  
REPEAT  
AUDIO  
DIRECT  
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE  
REPEAT  
AUDIO  
DIRECT  
SUBTITLE PLAY MODE  
PURE  
A
THX  
ALL ST  
PURE  
A
THX  
ALL ST  
PURE  
A
THX  
ALL ST  
TEST TONE  
CH SEL  
LEVEL  
-
LEVEL  
+
TEST TONE  
CH SEL  
LEVEL  
-
LEVEL  
+
TEST TONE  
CH SEL  
LEVEL  
-
LEVEL  
+
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF  
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF  
OPEN/CLOSE VIDEO OFF  
AUDIO SEL  
VCR  
L
NIGHT  
Re-EQ  
HDD  
AUDIO SEL  
VCR  
L
NIGHT  
Re-EQ  
HDD  
AUDIO SEL  
VCR  
L
NIGHT  
Re-EQ  
HDD  
7
DVD  
DVD  
DVD  
RC-690  
M
RC-690  
M
RC-690M  
A [ON], [STANDBY]  
A [ON], [STANDBY]  
A [ON], [STANDBY],TV [  
]*  
Set the satellite/cable receiver to  
Set the VCR to On or Standby.  
Set the TV to On or Standby.  
On or Standby.  
B Number buttons  
B Number buttons  
B Number buttons  
Enter numbers.  
Enter numbers.  
Enter numbers.  
C [CLEAR]  
C [CH +/–],TV CH [+]/[–]*  
C [CLEAR]  
Cancels functions.  
Select channels on the TV.  
Cancels functions.  
D [CH +/–]  
D [PREV CH]  
D [CH +/–]  
Selects channels on the VCR.  
Selects the previous channel.  
Selects satellite/cable channels.  
E [PREV CH]  
E [TV INPUT]*  
E [PREV CH]  
Selects the previous channel.  
Selects the TV’s external inputs.  
Selects the previous channel.  
F REC [  
]
F TV VOL [ ]/[ ]*  
F [GUIDE]  
Starts recording.  
Adjust the TV’s volume.  
Displays the program guide.  
G Eject [  
]
G [MUTING]  
G [ ], [  
]
Ejects the videocassette.  
Mutes the TV.  
Rewind and Fast forward.  
H [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], [  
]
H [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[MENU]/  
[ENTER]/[RETURN]  
H [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[MENU]/  
[ENTER]/[RETURN]  
Play, Pause, Stop, Rewind, and  
Fast forward.  
Navigate menus on the TV.  
Navigate menus on the satel-  
lite/cable receiver.  
I [ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[MENU]/  
[ENTER]/[RETURN]  
*Buttons marked with an asterisk (*)  
are exclusively for controlling a TV  
and can be used at any time, regard-  
less of the currently selected remote  
controller mode.  
Navigate menus on the VCR.  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Controlling Other Components—Continued  
Learning Commands  
Point the remote controllers at  
each other, about 2 to 6 inches  
(5–15 cm) apart, and then press  
and hold the button whose com-  
mand you want to learn until the  
Remote indicator flashes.  
3
The AV receiver’s remote controller can learn the com-  
mands of other remote controllers. By transmitting, for  
remote controller, the remote controller can learn it, and  
then transmit the exact same command when its Play  
If the command is learned successfully,  
the Remote indicator flashes twice.  
[
] button is pressed in the CD remote mode.  
This is useful when you’ve entered the appropriate  
remote control code (page 108) but some buttons don’t  
work as expected.  
V O L U M E  
M U T  
T O N E  
T E S T  
C H S E L  
C
P R E T  
T U N E R  
D V D  
T
I N P U T  
M U L T I - C H  
P H O N O  
G R O U P  
M O D E  
S U R  
N
T U  
D I S C  
C
D
E R  
V I D E O - 2  
About 2 to 6  
inches (5–15 cm)  
I N P U T L E C T O R  
T P E  
D I M M  
V I D E O - 1  
Remote  
indicator  
S L E E P  
D V
P O W E R  
ON  
STANDBY  
O
N
TV  
D
S
V
T
A
D
G
1
N
D
INPUT  
A
M
B
I
E
D
Y
/T  
4
C
R
1
V
T
/D  
A
P
V
R
2
E
7
AUX1  
PHONO  
10  
C
+
5
B
T
V
T
L
-
U
N
E
/
-
S
A
DVD  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
3
/
-
3
T
-
-
R
A
U
8
IN  
P
U
1
INPUT  
0
SELECTOR  
0
X
1
2
T
6
C
D
DVD  
+
MACRO  
T
+
TV CH  
-
9
V
1
GAME/TV  
4
2
AUX1  
5
1
D.TUN  
C
1
CLEAR  
H
2
R
EM  
VCR  
T
V
O
1
2
TE  
M
V
O
L
CABLE  
AUX  
6
2
3
O
SAT  
DE  
CDR/MD  
CD  
Z
O
DOCK  
N
E
3
Z
O
N
E
2
RECEIVER  
TAPE/A  
MP  
SLEEP  
TAPE  
7
TUNER  
8
CD  
9
RC-690M  
TV VOL  
PHONO  
D. TUN  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
INPUT SELECTOR  
MACRO  
CLEAR  
12  
0
To learn more commands, repeat  
steps 2 and 3.  
Press any REMOTE MODE button  
when you’ve finished.  
11  
4
ZONE  
ZONE  
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
CDR/MD  
1, 4  
TV  
CABLE  
SAT  
DOCK  
RECEIVER  
TAPE/AMP  
SLEEP  
DIMMER  
Notes:  
• The following buttons cannot learn new commands:  
+
REMOTE MODE, MACRO [1], [2], [3], TV [  
TV [INPUT], TV CH [+]/[–], TV VOL [ ]/[ ],  
Light.  
],  
CH  
ENTER  
VOL  
DISC  
ALBUM  
-
• The remote controller can learn approximately 70 to  
90 commands, although this will be less if commands  
that use a lot of memory are learned.  
• Remote controller buttons such as Play, Stop, Pause,  
controlling Onkyo CD players, cassette decks, and  
DVD players. However, they can learn new com-  
mands, and you can restore the preprogrammed com-  
mands at any time by resetting the remote controller  
(see page 109).  
While holding down the REMOTE  
MODE button for the mode in  
which you want to use the com-  
mand, press the [ON] button.  
The Remote indicator lights up.  
1
REMOTE MODE  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
TV  
CDR/MD  
CABLE  
SAT  
DOCK  
RECEIVER  
TAPE/AMP  
• To overwrite a previously learned command, repeat  
this procedure.  
• Only commands from infrared remote controllers can  
be learned.  
ON  
• When the remote controller’s batteries expire, all  
learned commands will be lost and will have to be  
learned all over again, so don’t discard your other  
remote controllers.  
Press the button you want to  
learn the new command.  
2
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Controlling Other Components—Continued  
Using Macros  
Press the buttons whose actions  
you want to program into the  
macro in the order you want them  
performed.  
For the CD example in the left column,  
you’d press the following buttons:  
[ON], [CD] INPUT SELECTOR, [CD]  
REMOTE MODE, Play [ ].  
2
You can program the remote controller’s MACRO but-  
tons to perform a sequence of remote control actions.  
Example:  
To play a CD you typically need to perform the follow-  
ing actions:  
1. Press the [RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE button  
to select the Receiver remote controller mode.  
2. Press the [ON] button to turn on the AV receiver.  
3. Press the [CD] INPUT SELECTOR button to  
select the CD input source.  
4. Press the [CD] REMOTE MODE button to select  
the CD remote controller mode.  
5. Press the Play [ ] button to start playback on the  
When you’ve finished, press the  
MACRO button again.  
The Remote indicator flashes twice.  
If you enter eight commands, the pro-  
cess will finish automatically.  
3
CD player.  
Note:  
• If any of the buttons you used to make a macro are  
taught new commands, the macro will no longer work  
properly and will have to be made again.  
You can program a MACRO button so that all five  
actions are performed with just one button press.  
Making Macros  
Running Macros  
Each MACRO button can store one macro, and each  
macro can contain up to eight commands.  
Press the MACRO [1], [2], or [3]  
button.  
Remote  
The commands in the macro are trans-  
mitted in the order in which they were  
programmed. Keep the remote control-  
ler pointed at the AV receiver until all  
of the commands have been transmit-  
ted.  
indicator  
ON  
STANDBY  
TV  
INPUT  
DVD  
VCR/DVR  
CBL/SAT  
3
+
TV CH  
-
1
GAME/TV  
4
2
AUX1  
5
AUX  
6
2
TAPE  
7
TUNER  
8
CD  
9
TV VOL  
PHONO  
D. TUN  
Macros can be run at any time, regard-  
less of the current remote controller  
mode.  
+10  
-- --- 10  
/
INPUT SELECTOR  
MACRO  
CLEAR  
12  
0
11  
MACRO  
1, 2, 3  
ZONE  
3
2
1
2
3
REMOTE MODE  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
ZONE  
CDR/MD  
REMOTE  
MODE  
TV  
CABLE  
SAT  
DOCK  
RECEIVER  
TAPE/AMP  
SLEEP  
RECEIVER  
DIMMER  
Deleting Macros  
While holding down the  
[RECEIVER] REMOTE MODE but-  
ton, press the MACRO button  
1
While holding down the REMOTE  
MODE button of the remote con-  
troller mode you want to use at  
the start of the macro, press  
MACRO button [1], [2], or [3].  
The Remote indicator lights up.  
RECEIVER  
1
REMOTE MODE  
whose macro you want to delete.  
DVD  
VCR  
CD  
TV  
CDR/MD  
CABLE  
SAT  
DOCK  
RECEIVER  
TAPE/AMP  
For the CD example in the left column,  
you’d press and hold the [RECEIVER]  
REMOTE MODE button, and then  
press MACRO button [1], [2], or [3].  
Press the MACRO button again.  
2
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
If you have any trouble using the AV receiver, look for a  
solution in this section. If you can’t resolve the issue  
yourself, contact your Onkyo dealer.  
press the remote controller’s [MUTING] button to  
unmute the AV receiver (page 68).  
• While a pair of headphones is connected to the  
PHONES jack, no sound is output by the main room  
speakers (page 69).  
If you can’t resolve the issue yourself, try resetting  
the AV receiver before contacting your Onkyo dealer.  
To reset the AV receiver to its factory defaults,  
turn it on and, while holding down the [VCR/DVR]  
button, press the [STANDBY/ON] button. “Clear”  
will appear on the display and the AV receiver will  
enter Standby mode.  
• Check the digital audio output settings on the source  
component. On some game consoles, such as those  
that can play DVDs, the default setting is off.  
audio format from a menu or with the AUDIO button  
STANDBY/ON  
• If your turntable uses an MC cartridge, you must use  
an MC head amp or MC transformer (page 40).  
• Check the speaker settings (pages 86–91).  
• If the digital signal format is set to PCM or DTS, set it  
to Auto (page 70).  
• If there’s no sound from a DVD player connected to an  
HDMI IN, check the DVD player’s output settings,  
and be sure to select a compatible audio format.  
VCR/DVR  
Note that resetting the AV receiver will delete your  
radio presets and custom settings.  
Power  
Only the front speakers produce sound  
front speakers and subwoofer produce sound.  
• In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers  
output sound if the Output Speaker setting is set to L/R  
(page 83).  
Can’t turn on the AV receiver  
• Make sure that the power cord is plugged into the wall  
outlet properly.  
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet, wait 5  
seconds or more, then plug it back in again.  
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 86).  
The AV receiver turns off as soon as it’s turned  
on  
Only the center speaker produces sound  
• If you use the Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie or Dolby  
Pro Logic IIx Music listening mode with a mono  
speaker.  
• In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers  
output sound if the Output Speaker setting is set to C  
(page 83).  
• The amp protection circuit has been activated.  
Remove the power cord from the wall outlet immedi-  
ately. Disconnect all speaker cables and input sources,  
and leave the AV receiver with its power cord discon-  
nected for 1 hour. After that, reconnect the power cord  
and set the volume to maximum. If the AV receiver  
stays on, set the volume to minimum, disconnect the  
power cord, and reconnect your speakers and input  
sources. If the AV receiver turns off when you set the  
volume to maximum, disconnect the power cord, and  
contact your Onkyo dealer.  
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 86).  
The surround speakers produce no sound  
the surround speakers produce no sound.  
• Depending on the source and the current listening  
mode, not much sound may be produced by the sur-  
round speakers. Try another listening mode (page 71).  
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 86).  
Audio  
There’s no sound or it’s very quiet  
selector (page 52).  
• Make sure that the correct audio input is selected  
(page 70).  
The center speaker produces no sound  
speaker produces no sound.  
• In the Mono listening mode, only the front speakers  
output sound if the Output Speaker setting is set to L/R  
(page 83).  
• Make sure that all audio connecting plugs are pushed  
in all the way (page 27).  
• Make sure that the polarity of the speaker cables is  
correct, and that the bare wire is in contact with the  
metal part of each speaker terminal (page 22).  
• Make sure that the speaker cables are not shorting.  
• Check the volume (page 62). The AV receiver is  
designed for home theater enjoyment and has a wide  
volume range for precise adjustment.  
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 86).  
The surround back speakers produce no sound  
• The surround back speakers are not used with all lis-  
tening modes. Try another listening mode (page 71).  
• Not much sound may be produced by the surround  
back speakers with some sources.  
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 86).  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting—Continued  
• While Powered Zone 2 is being used, playback in the  
round back speakers produce no sound (page 101).  
• When DTS program material ends and the DTS bit-  
stream stops, the AV receiver remains in DTS listen-  
ing mode and the DTS indicator remains on. This is to  
prevent noise when you use the pause, fast forward, or  
fast reverse function on your player. If you switch your  
player from DTS to PCM, as the AV receiver does not  
switch formats immediately, you may not hear any-  
thing, in which case you should stop your player for  
about 3 seconds, and then resume playback.  
• With some CD players, you won’t be able to playback  
DTS material properly even though your player is con-  
nected to a digital input on the AV receiver. This is  
usually because the DTS bitstream has been processed  
(e.g., output level, sampling rate, or frequency  
response changed) and the AV receiver doesn’t recog-  
nize it as a genuine DTS signal. In such cases, you  
may hear noise.  
The subwoofer produces no sound  
• If the source material contains no audio in the LFE  
channel, the subwoofer produces no sound.  
• Check the Speaker Configuration (page 86).  
The Zone 2/3 speakers produce no sound  
• The Zone 2/3 speakers only output sources that are  
connected to an analog input. Check to see if the  
source component is connected to an analog input.  
• On the TX-SR875, Powered Zone 2 cannot be used if  
the Speaker Type is set to Bi-Amp or BTL (page 45).  
There’s no sound with a certain signal format  
• Check the digital audio output setting on the source  
component. On some game consoles, such as those  
that can play DVDs, the default setting is off.  
• With some DVD-Video discs, you need to select an  
audio format from a menu or with the AUDIO button  
on your DVD player’s remote controller.  
The beginning of audio received by an HDMI IN  
can’t be heard  
• Since it takes longer to identify the format of an  
HDMI signal than it does for other digital audio sig-  
nals, sound may not be output immediately.  
Can’t get 6.1- or 7.1-channel playback  
• While Powered Zone 2 is being used, playback in the  
main room is reduced to 5.1-channels and the sur-  
round back speakers produce no sound (page 101).  
Video  
There’s no picture  
• Make sure that all video connecting plugs are pushed  
in all the way (page 27).  
• Make sure that each video component is properly con-  
nected.  
Can’t select the Pure Audio listening mode  
• The Pure Audio listening mode cannot be selected  
while Zone 2 is on.  
• Check to see if a maximum volume has been set  
(page 96).  
• After the Automatic Speaker Setup function has been  
run, or the volume level of each individual speaker has  
been adjusted (pages 68 and 90), the maximum vol-  
ume may be reduced.  
• On your TV, make sure that the video input to which  
the AV receiver is connected is selected.  
video circuitry is turned off and only the HDMI OUT  
outputs video signals.  
• If your TV is connected to the HDMI OUT, set the  
HDMI Monitor setting toYes (page 46), and select “-  
• If your TV is connected to the COMPONENTVIDEO  
OUT, set the HDMI Monitor setting to No (page 46),  
and select “- - -” in the “Component Video Input  
Setup” on page 50 to watch composite video and  
S-Video sources.  
Noise can be heard  
• Using cable ties to bundle audio cables with power  
cords, speaker cables, and so on can degrade audio  
performance, so don’t use them.  
• An audio cable may be picking up interference. Try  
repositioning your cables.  
• Make sure that the source is Dolby Digital (page 81).  
input, your TV must be connected to the COMPO-  
NENT VIDEO OUT or HDMI OUT (page 28).  
• If the video source is connected to an HDMI input,  
your TV must be connected to the HDMI OUT  
(page 28).  
• Check the multichannel input connections (page 32).  
• Make sure that the multichannel input is assigned to  
the input selector (page 54).  
• Make sure that the multichannel input is selected  
(page 70).  
• Check the audio output settings on your DVD player.  
There’s no picture from a source connected to  
an HDMI IN  
About DTS signals  
• When the HDMI Monitor setting is set to No, and the  
Resolution setting is set to anything other than  
Through (see page 46), no video is output by the  
HDMI OUT.  
• When playing DTS program material, using the pause,  
fast forward, or fast reverse function on your player  
may produce a short audible noise. This is not a mal-  
function.  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting—Continued  
• If the message “Resolution Error” appears on the AV  
receiver’s display, this indicates that your TV does not  
support the current video resolution and you need to  
select another resolution on your DVD player.  
• To control an Onkyo component that’s connected via  
, point the remote controller at the AV receiver. Be  
sure to enter the appropriate remote control code first  
(page 109).  
• To control an Onkyo component that’s not connected  
The onscreen menus don’t appear  
the AV receiver is connected is selected.  
via  
, or another manufacturer’s component, point  
the remote controller at that component. Be sure to  
enter the appropriate remote control code first  
(page 108).  
The picture is distorted  
• On non-North American models, specify the TV sys-  
tem used in your area in the “TV Format Setup” on  
page 60.  
Can’t learn commands from another remote  
controller  
• When learning commands, make sure that the trans-  
mitting ends of both remote controllers are pointing at  
each other.  
Tuner  
Reception is noisy, stereo FM reception suffers  
light up  
• Are you trying to learn from a remote controller that  
cannot be used for learning? Some commands cannot  
be learned, especially those that contain several  
instructions.  
• Relocate your antenna.  
• Move the AV receiver away from your TV or com-  
puter.  
• Listen to the station in mono (page 63).  
• When listening to anAM station, operating the remote  
controller may cause noise.  
• Passing cars and airplanes can cause interference.  
• Concrete walls weaken radio signals.  
• If nothing improves the reception, install an outdoor  
antenna.  
Recording  
Can’t record  
• On your recorder, make sure the correct input is  
selected.  
• To prevent signal loops and damage to the AV  
receiver, input signals are not fed through to outputs  
with the same name (e.g., TAPE IN to TAPE OUT or  
VCR/DVR IN to VCR/DVR OUT).  
• When the PureAudio listening mode is selected, video  
recording is not possible because no video signals are  
output. Select another listening mode.  
Remote Controller  
The remote controller doesn’t work  
rect polarity (page 14).  
away from the AV receiver and there’s no obstruction  
remote control sensor (page 14).  
• Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote control-  
ler mode (page 15).  
• Make sure you’ve entered the correct remote control  
code (page 108).  
Others  
The sound changes when I connect my head-  
phones  
• When a pair of headphones is connected, the listening  
mode is set to Stereo, unless it’s already set to Stereo,  
same.  
How do I change the language of a multiplex  
source  
• On the Audio Adjust menu, change the Multiplex set-  
Can’t control other components  
• Make sure you’ve selected the correct remote control-  
ler mode (page 15).  
• If you’ve connected an  
-capable Onkyo MD  
The  
functions don’t work  
recorder, CD recorder, or RI Dock to the TAPE  
IN/OUT jacks, or an RI Dock to the GAME/TV IN  
jacks, for the remote controller to work properly, you  
must set the Input Display to MD, CDR, or DOCK,  
respectively (see page 51).  
• To use  
, you must make an  
connection and an  
analog audio connection (RCA) between the compo-  
nent and AV receiver, even if they are connected digi-  
tally (page 43).  
• While Zone 2 or Zone 3 is selected, the  
don’t work.  
functions  
• The entered remote control code may not be correct. If  
more than one code is listed, try each one.  
• If none of the codes work, use the Learning function  
to learn the commands of the other component’s  
remote controller (page 111).  
The AV receiver’s display doesn’t work  
• The display is turned off when the Pure Audio listen-  
ing mode is selected. Select another listening mode.  
• With some AV components, certain buttons may not  
work as expected, and some may not work at all.  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting—Continued  
The AV receiver contains a microcomputer for signal pro-  
cessing and control functions. In very rare situations,  
severe interference, noise from an external source, or  
static electricity may cause it to lockup. In the unlikely  
event that this happens, unplug the power cord from the  
wall outlet, wait at least 5 seconds, and then plug it back  
in again.  
Onkyo is not responsible for damages (such as CD  
rental fees) due to unsuccessful recordings caused by  
this unit’s malfunction. Before you record important  
data, make sure that the material will be recorded cor-  
rectly.  
For North American and Australian models, set the AV  
receiver to Standby before disconnecting the power  
cord from the wall outlet. For other models, set the AV  
receiver to Standby and the POWER switch to OFF  
before disconnecting the power cord.  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Amplifier Section  
Video Section  
Rated Output Power  
TX-SR805:  
North American:  
Input Sensitivity/Output  
Level and Impedance  
1 Vp-p /75(Component and S-VideoY)  
0.7 Vp-p /75(Component Pb/Cb,Pr/Cr)  
0.28 Vp-p /75(S-Video C)  
130 watts minimum continuous power per channel, 8 ohm  
loads, 2 channels driven from 20 Hz to 20 kHz, with a  
maximum total harmonic distortion of 0.05% (FTC)  
150 watts minimum continuous power per channel, 8 ohm  
loads, 2 channels driven at 1 kHz, with a maximum total  
harmonic distortion of 0.7% (FTC)  
1 Vp-p /75(Composite)  
Component Video  
Frequency Response  
5 Hz – 100 MHz, –3 dB  
160 watts minimum continuous power per channel, 6 ohm  
loads, 2 channels driven at 1 kHz, with a maximum total  
harmonic distortion of 0.1% (FTC)  
Tuner Section  
FM  
Tuning Frequency Range  
North American:  
European:  
7 ch × 180 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch driven (IEC)  
87.5 MHz– 107.9 MHz  
European and Asian: 87.5 MHz– 108.0 MHz  
Asian:  
7 ch × 180 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch driven (IEC)  
TX-SR875:  
North American:  
AM  
140 watts minimum continuous power per channel, 8 ohm  
loads, 2 channels driven from 20 Hz to 20 kHz, with a  
maximum total harmonic distortion of 0.05% (FTC)  
160 watts minimum continuous power per channel, 8 ohm  
loads, 2 channels driven at 1 kHz, with a maximum total  
harmonic distortion of 0.7% (FTC)  
Tuning Frequency Range  
North American:  
European:  
Asian:  
530 kHz–1710 kHz  
522 kHz–1611 kHz  
522 kHz–1611 kHz  
530 kHz–1710 kHz  
170 watts minimum continuous power per channel, 6 ohm  
loads, 2 channels driven at 1 kHz, with a maximum total  
harmonic distortion of 0.1% (FTC)  
Preset Channel  
40  
European:  
7 ch × 200 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch driven (IEC)  
Asian:  
General  
7 ch × 200 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch driven (IEC)  
Power Supply  
AC 120 V, 60 Hz  
Maximum Output Power  
AC 220-240 V, 50/60 Hz  
AC 220-240 V, 50/60 Hz  
TX-SR805:  
Asian:  
7 ch × 230 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch driven (JEITA)  
TX-SR875:  
Asian:  
Power Consumption  
North American:  
9.5 A  
European and Asian: 870 W  
7 ch × 250 W at 6 ohms, 1 kHz, 1 ch driven (JEITA)  
Dimensions  
(W × H × D)  
Dynamic Power  
435 × 194 × 458.5 mm  
TX-SR805:  
300 W (3, Front)  
250 W (4, Front)  
150 W (8, Front)  
320 W (3, Front)  
270 W (4, Front)  
160 W (8, Front)  
17-1/8"  
×
7-5/8"× 18-1/16"  
Weight  
North American:  
23.1 kg  
50.9 lbs.  
European and Asian: 23.3 kg  
51.4 lbs.  
TX-SR875:  
THD (Total Harmonic  
Distortion)  
0.05% (Power Rated)  
Video Input  
Damping Factor  
Input Sensitivity and  
Impedance  
60 (Front, 1 kHz, 8)  
HDMI  
200 mV/ 47 k(LINE)  
2.5 mV/47 k(PHONO MM)  
TX-SR805:  
TX-SR875:  
Component  
Composite  
IN 1, IN 2, IN 3  
IN 1, IN 2, IN 3, IN 4  
IN 1 (DVD), IN 2, IN 3  
AUX 1, GAME/TV, CBL/SAT,  
VCR/DVR, DVD, AUX 2  
AUX 1, GAME/TV, CBL/SAT,  
VCR/DVR, DVD, AUX 2  
Output Level and  
Impedance  
Phono Overload  
Frequency Response  
Tone Control  
200 mV/ 470 (REC OUT)  
70 mV (MM 1 kHz, 0.5%)  
5 Hz–100 kHz/ +1 dB–3 dB (Direct mode)  
10 dB, 20 Hz (BASS)  
S-Video  
10 dB, 20 kHz (TREBLE)  
110 dB (LINE, IHF-A)  
80 dB (PHONO, IHF-A)  
Video Output  
HDMI  
Signal to Noise Ratio  
Speaker Impedance  
OUT  
MONITOR OUT  
VCR/DVR OUT, MONITOR OUT  
VCR/DVR OUT, MONITOR OUT  
Component  
Composite  
S-Video  
4–16Ω  
Audio Inputs  
Digital Inputs  
COAXIAL (IN 1, IN 2, IN 3),  
OPTICAL (IN 1, IN 2), DIGITAL  
Analog Inputs  
PHONO, CD, TAPE, AUX 1, GAME/TV,  
CBL/SAT, VCR/DVR, DVD, MULTI CH  
(FRONT, CENTER, SUBWOOFER,  
SURR, SURR BACK), AUX 2  
Multichannel Inputs  
7.1 ch  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Specifications—Continued  
Audio Outputs  
Digital Output  
Analog Outputs  
OPTICAL (OUT)  
TAPE, VCR/DVR, PRE OUT (FRONT,  
CENTER, SUBWOOFER, SURR, SURR  
BACK, ZONE 2, ZONE 3)  
Multichannel Pre  
Outputs  
7
Subwoofer Pre Outputs  
Speaker Outputs  
1
ZONE2 R, SURR BACK R, FRONT R,  
SURR R, CENTER, SURR L, FRONT L,  
SURR BACK L, ZONE2 L  
Phones  
PHONES  
Control Terminal  
MIC  
Yes  
RS232  
1
IR Input/Output  
12 V Trigger Out  
USB  
1/1  
1
No  
Specifications and features are subject to change without  
notice.  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memo  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sales & Product Planning Div. : 2-1, Nisshin-cho, Neyagawa-shi, OSAKA 572-8540, JAPAN  
Tel: 072-831-8023 Fax: 072-831-8124  
ONKYO U.S.A. CORPORATION  
18 Park Way, Upper Saddle River, N.J. 07458, U.S.A.  
Tel: 201-785-2600 Fax: 201-785-2650 http://www.us.onkyo.com/  
ONKYO EUROPE ELECTRONICS GmbH  
Liegnitzerstrasse 6, 82194 Groebenzell, GERMANY  
Tel: +49-8142-4401-0 Fax: +49-8142-4401-555 http://www.eu.onkyo.com/  
ONKYO EUROPE UK Office  
Suite 1, Gregories Court, Gregories Road, Beaconsfield, Buckinghamshire, HP9 1HQ  
UNITED KINGDOM Tel: +44-(0)1494-681515 Fax: +44(0)-1494-680452  
HOMEPAGE  
http://www.onkyo.com/  
ONKYO CHINA LIMITED  
Unit 1&12, 9/F, Ever Gain PlazaTower 1, 88, Container Port Road, Kwai Chung,  
N.T., HONG KONG Tel: 852-2429-3118 Fax: 852-2428-9039  
http://www.ch.onkyo.com/  
Printed in Japan  
I0705-3  
SN 29344449B  
(C) Copyright 2007 ONKYO CORPORATION Japan. All rights reserved.  
* 2 9 3 4 4 4 4 9 B *  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Miller Electric Welder S 74S User Manual
Multiquip Trash Compactor QP2TH User Manual
NetComm Network Router AM5065 User Manual
Olympus Webcam VH487701 User Manual
Ovideon Car Video System LCS2740 User Manual
OWI Portable Speaker TRP70B User Manual
Panasonic Camcorder Accessories AJ HVF21G User Manual
Panasonic CD Player CQ C7405W User Manual
Panasonic VCR AJ HD1400P User Manual
Parasound Stereo Amplifier JC 2 User Manual